Vous êtes sur la page 1sur 414

MDRS 155/...

-64/128 MLQAM E SDH Long-Haul Microwave Radio Systems

Operating Instructions
Release 2.3
(RF/160 OI) Edition 12.2004

Marconi Communications GmbH D-71520 Backnang Telefon (07191) 13-0 Telefax (07191) 13-3212 http://www.marconi.com Copyright 2004 by Marconi Communications GmbH (hierin bezeichnet als Marconi) nderungen vorbehalten Gedruckt in Deutschland Marconi, Marconi Communications, das Marconi Logo, MDRS, MDMS und ServiceOn Access sind eingetragene Markenzeichen von Marconi Communications GmbH. Windows ist ein eingetragenes Markenzeichen der Microsoft Corporation, Redmond. Marconi Communications GmbH D-71520 Backnang Telephone +49 (7191) 13-0 Telefax +49 (7191) 13-3212 http://www.marconi.com Copyright 2004 by Marconi Communications GmbH (herein referred to as Marconi) Specifications subject to change Printed in Germany Marconi, Marconi Communications, the Marconi logo, MDRS, MDMS and ServiceOn Access are trademarks of Marconi Communications GmbH. Windows is a trademark of Microsoft Corporation, Redmond.

Operating Instructions

Contents

Contents 1 Safety Instructions........................................................................1-1


1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8 Application............................................................................................................................ 1-1 Protection class ................................................................................................................... 1-1 Operating voltage................................................................................................................. 1-1 Rack installation................................................................................................................... 1-2 Rack grounding.................................................................................................................... 1-2 ESD protection ..................................................................................................................... 1-3 Laser safety .......................................................................................................................... 1-4 RF interfaces ........................................................................................................................ 1-6

2 Rack Configuration .......................................................................2-1


2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4 2.5 Channel positions ................................................................................................................ 2-6 Modem Unit addresses........................................................................................................ 2-9 RPSC addresses ................................................................................................................ 2-10 LON and CAN system bus ................................................................................................ 2-11 STM-1 Section Overhead (SOH) ....................................................................................... 2-13

3 Starting the Service PC ................................................................3-1 4 Configuration ................................................................................4-1


4.1 General settings ................................................................................................................... 4-2 4.1.1 Protection switching mode / Redundancy....................................................................... 4-2 4.1.2 XPIC................................................................................................................................ 4-2 4.1.3 ATPC .............................................................................................................................. 4-2 4.1.4 STM-1 processing........................................................................................................... 4-2 4.1.5 Protection switching ........................................................................................................ 4-2 4.1.6 Auxiliary channels ........................................................................................................... 4-2 4.2 4.3 4.4 4.5 Transmitter (Tx).................................................................................................................... 4-3 Tx oscillator .......................................................................................................................... 4-7 Main receiver (Rx) ................................................................................................................ 4-8 Rx oscillator........................................................................................................................ 4-12

4.6 Diversity receiver (RxD) .................................................................................................... 4-13 4.6.1 Delay time compensation in space diversity configurations ......................................... 4-16 4.7 Modem Unit (MU)................................................................................................................ 4-17 4.7.1 SPI STM-1 - Electrical .................................................................................................. 4-18 4.7.2 SPI STM-1 - Optical ...................................................................................................... 4-19 4.7.3 RPSI STM-1.................................................................................................................. 4-20 4.7.4 Modem Unit Power Supply ........................................................................................... 4-21 4.7.5 Modulator ...................................................................................................................... 4-22 4.7.6 Demodulator ................................................................................................................. 4-24 4.7.7 Controller module.......................................................................................................... 4-27 4.7.8 DPU/RPS STM-1 Data Processing Unit ....................................................................... 4-28 4.7.9 DPU/RPS STM-1 manual protection switching ............................................................ 4-44 4.7.9.1 Line protection (n+1/2) .............................................................................................. 4-44 4.7.9.2 Equipment protection (1+1 HSB) .............................................................................. 4-48 4.8 RPSC + RPSH modules ..................................................................................................... 4-50 4.8.1 RPSC module ............................................................................................................... 4-50 4.8.2 RPSH module ............................................................................................................... 4-51 RF/160 OI I

Contents

Operating Instructions

4.9 Overhead Access Unit (OHAU)......................................................................................... 4-52 4.9.1 Overview ....................................................................................................................... 4-52 4.9.2 Service channels and connection options .................................................................... 4-53 4.9.3 OHAU power supply ..................................................................................................... 4-56 4.9.4 RFCOH Access Module................................................................................................ 4-57 4.9.4.1 RFCOH wayside interface 75 Ohm........................................................................... 4-64 4.9.4.2 RFCOH wayside interface 120 Ohm......................................................................... 4-65 4.9.5 EOW module................................................................................................................. 4-66 4.9.6 QTN module.................................................................................................................. 4-69 4.9.7 ECC Gateway module .................................................................................................. 4-73 4.9.8 ECC Gateway module - addresses .............................................................................. 4-75 4.9.8.1 Q3p operating mode ................................................................................................. 4-76 4.9.8.2 QD2-IP operating mode ............................................................................................ 4-80 4.9.8.3 QD2-SISA-V operating mode.................................................................................... 4-82 4.9.8.4 QD2-SISA-V-IP operating mode ............................................................................... 4-84 4.9.8.5 QD2-via-SISA-V operating modes ............................................................................ 4-86 4.9.9 ECC Gateway Module - IP Routing .............................................................................. 4-88 4.9.10 SOH Access Module..................................................................................................... 4-89 4.9.10.1 SOH wayside interface 75 Ohm.............................................................................. 4-107 4.9.10.2 SOH wayside interface 120 Ohm............................................................................ 4-108 4.9.11 SOH Extension Module .............................................................................................. 4-109 4.9.12 SISA-0/N ..................................................................................................................... 4-115 4.9.13 SISA-K/R..................................................................................................................... 4-116 4.9.14 XQI.............................................................................................................................. 4-123

5 Alignment ......................................................................................5-1
5.1 5.2 5.3 5.4 5.5 5.6 5.7 Introduction .......................................................................................................................... 5-1 Display................................................................................................................................... 5-1 Overall alignment ................................................................................................................. 5-3 Checking alignment data..................................................................................................... 5-4 Selective alignment.............................................................................................................. 5-5 Hot Standby or 1+1 without occasional traffic.................................................................. 5-6 Alignment errors .................................................................................................................. 5-7

6 Alarms............................................................................................6-1
6.1 6.2 6.3 6.4 6.5 Standard module alarms ..................................................................................................... 6-1 Transmitter (Tx).................................................................................................................... 6-3 TX/RX oscillator.................................................................................................................... 6-4 Main receiver ........................................................................................................................ 6-5 Diversity receiver ................................................................................................................. 6-6

6.6 Modem Unit........................................................................................................................... 6-7 6.6.1 SPI STM-1 - Electrical .................................................................................................... 6-7 6.6.2 SPI STM-1 - Optical ........................................................................................................ 6-7 6.6.3 RPSI STM-1.................................................................................................................... 6-9 6.6.4 Modem Unit power supply ............................................................................................ 6-10 6.6.5 Modulator ...................................................................................................................... 6-11 6.6.6 Demodulator ................................................................................................................. 6-12 6.6.7 Controller module.......................................................................................................... 6-14 6.6.8 DPU/RPS STM-1 Data Processing Unit ....................................................................... 6-15 6.7 RPSC + RPSH modules ..................................................................................................... 6-19 6.7.1 RPSC module ............................................................................................................... 6-19 6.7.2 RPSH module ............................................................................................................... 6-20 6.8 Overhead Access Unit (OHAU)......................................................................................... 6-21 6.8.1 OHAU power supply ..................................................................................................... 6-21 II RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions 6.8.2 6.8.3 6.8.4 6.8.5 6.8.6 6.8.7 6.8.8 6.8.9 6.8.10 6.9

Contents

RFCOH Access Module................................................................................................ 6-22 EOW module................................................................................................................. 6-30 QTN module.................................................................................................................. 6-31 ECC Gateway module .................................................................................................. 6-32 SOH Access Module..................................................................................................... 6-33 SOH Extension ............................................................................................................. 6-43 SISA-0/N ....................................................................................................................... 6-45 SISA-K/R....................................................................................................................... 6-46 XQI................................................................................................................................ 6-47

Alignment / OP/PR channel failure................................................................................... 6-48

7 Measuring Values/Thresholds and Performance Counters .......7-1


7.1 7.2 7.3 7.4 Overview of performance counters available ................................................................... 7-1 Transmitter ........................................................................................................................... 7-2 Main receiver ........................................................................................................................ 7-4 Diversity receiver ................................................................................................................. 7-6

7.5 Modem Unit........................................................................................................................... 7-7 7.5.1 SPI STM-1 - Electrical .................................................................................................... 7-7 7.5.2 SPI STM-1 - Optical ...................................................................................................... 7-10 7.5.3 RPSI STM-1.................................................................................................................. 7-13 7.5.4 Modem Unit power supply ............................................................................................ 7-16 7.5.5 Modulator ...................................................................................................................... 7-17 7.5.6 Demodulator ................................................................................................................. 7-18 7.5.7 Controller module.......................................................................................................... 7-19 7.5.8 DPU/RPS STM-1 Data Processing Unit ....................................................................... 7-20 7.6 RPSC + RPSH module ....................................................................................................... 7-33 7.7 OHAU Overhead Access Unit ........................................................................................... 7-34 7.7.1 OHAU power supply ..................................................................................................... 7-34 7.7.2 RFCOH Access Module................................................................................................ 7-35 7.7.3 EOW module................................................................................................................. 7-36 7.7.4 QTN module.................................................................................................................. 7-37 7.7.5 SOH Access Module..................................................................................................... 7-38 7.7.6 SOH Extension module ................................................................................................ 7-39 7.7.7 SISA-0/N module .......................................................................................................... 7-40 7.7.8 SISA-K/R....................................................................................................................... 7-41 7.7.9 XQI................................................................................................................................ 7-42

8 Software, Equipment and Configuration Management ..............8-1


8.1 8.2 8.3 8.4 8.5 8.6 8.7 Required operator software ................................................................................................ 8-1 Software download to system modules ............................................................................ 8-1 OSI parameter file transfer to the ECC Gateway Module................................................. 8-1 OSI parameter upload from the ECC Gateway module.................................................... 8-2 Saving and loading equipment configuration data .......................................................... 8-2 Creating a system data table .............................................................................................. 8-3 Adjusting the system time .................................................................................................. 8-3

9 What is when? Troubleshooting .................................................9-1


9.1 Module replacement ............................................................................................................ 9-1 9.1.1 Safety instructions........................................................................................................... 9-1 9.1.2 Module replacement - effects on the STM-1 signal ........................................................ 9-1 9.2 Replacing modules .............................................................................................................. 9-2 9.2.1 Transmitter TX ................................................................................................................ 9-2 9.2.2 Receiver RX.................................................................................................................... 9-3 9.2.3 RPS-C............................................................................................................................. 9-4 RF/160 OI III

Contents

Operating Instructions

9.2.4 RPS-H............................................................................................................................. 9-4 9.2.5 Modem Unit..................................................................................................................... 9-5 9.2.5.1 SPI STM-1 electrical.................................................................................................... 9-5 9.2.5.2 SPI STM-1 optical ....................................................................................................... 9-6 9.2.5.3 RPSI STM-1 ................................................................................................................ 9-6 9.2.5.4 Modem Unit Power Supply.......................................................................................... 9-6 9.2.5.5 Modulator / Demodulator............................................................................................. 9-7 9.2.5.6 Controller..................................................................................................................... 9-7 9.2.5.7 DPU/RPS STM-1......................................................................................................... 9-8 9.2.6 OHAU.............................................................................................................................. 9-9 9.2.6.1 OHAU Power Supply................................................................................................... 9-9 9.2.6.2 RFCOH EAST / WEST.............................................................................................. 9-10 9.2.6.3 EOW .......................................................................................................................... 9-10 9.2.6.4 QTN........................................................................................................................... 9-10 9.2.6.5 SISA-K/R ................................................................................................................... 9-11 9.2.6.6 ECC Gateway............................................................................................................ 9-11 9.2.6.7 SOH Access / SOH Extension .................................................................................. 9-11 9.2.6.8 SISA-0/N ................................................................................................................... 9-12 9.3 9.4 9.5 RF Unit ................................................................................................................................ 9-13 Modem Unit......................................................................................................................... 9-14 RPS ...................................................................................................................................... 9-18

9.6 OHA Unit ............................................................................................................................. 9-18 9.6.1 OHAU power supply ..................................................................................................... 9-18 9.6.2 RFCOH Access Module................................................................................................ 9-19 9.6.3 SOH Access Module..................................................................................................... 9-21 9.6.4 SOH Extension Module ................................................................................................ 9-25 9.6.5 SISA0/N ........................................................................................................................ 9-27 9.6.6 EOW and QTN.............................................................................................................. 9-28

10 Subracks and Modules ............................................................... 10-1


10.1 10.2 10.3 10.4 10.5 Transmitter (Tx).................................................................................................................. 10-1 Main and diversity receiver (Rx / RxD)............................................................................. 10-2 RPS-C .................................................................................................................................. 10-3 RPS-H .................................................................................................................................. 10-4 Modem Unit......................................................................................................................... 10-5

10.6 OHAU subrack.................................................................................................................... 10-6 10.6.1 OHAU subrack (depicted with QD2 interface module) ................................................ 10-6 10.6.2 OHAU subrack (depicted with ECC Gateway module)................................................. 10-7

11 Channel Patterns ........................................................................ 11-1


11.1 11.2 11.3 11.4 11.5 11.6 11.7 Channel patterns of the 4 GHz RF band .......................................................................... 11-1 Channel patterns of the 5 GHz RF band .......................................................................... 11-7 Channel patterns of the L6 RF band ................................................................................ 11-9 Channel patters of the U6 RF band ................................................................................ 11-11 Channel patterns of the 7 GHz RF band ........................................................................ 11-12 Channel patterns of the 8 GHz RF band ........................................................................ 11-15 Channel patterns of the 13 GHz RF band ...................................................................... 11-18

12 Frequency Setting....................................................................... 12-1


12.1 12.2 12.3 IV Frequency setting in the 3.6 GHz RF band...................................................................... 12-1 Frequency setting in the 3.9 GHz RF band...................................................................... 12-2 Frequency setting in the 4.7 GHz RF band...................................................................... 12-4 RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions 12.4 12.5 12.6 12.7 12.8

Contents

Frequency setting in the 6.2 GHz RF band...................................................................... 12-5 Frequency setting in the 6.8 GHz RF band...................................................................... 12-6 Frequency setting in the 7 GHz RF band......................................................................... 12-7 Frequency setting in the 8 GHz RF band......................................................................... 12-8 Frequency setting in the 13 GHz RF band....................................................................... 12-9

13 Connectors .................................................................................. 13-1


13.1 13.2 Connectors of the transmitter (Tx)................................................................................... 13-2 Connectors of the main and diversity receiver (Rx and RxD) ....................................... 13-4

13.3 Connectors of the Modem Unit......................................................................................... 13-7 13.3.1 Connectors of the SPI El. and SPI Opt. module......................................................... 13-14 13.4 Connectors of the Overhead Access Unit ..................................................................... 13-15 13.4.1 Connectors of SISA- 0/N and Q modules ................................................................... 13-38 13.5 Connectors of RPS-C and RPS-H modules ................................................................... 13-39

14 Ordering Information .................................................................. 14-1


14.1 14.2 CE compliance ................................................................................................................... 14-1 Ordering information ......................................................................................................... 14-1

15 After-Sales Service ..................................................................... 15-1 16 Annex 1: Operating Instructions - EOW Module....................... 16-1 17 Annex 2: Support of the QD2 Information Model...................... 17-1
17.1 17.2 17.3 QD2 view ............................................................................................................................. 17-1 Functional groups supported ........................................................................................... 17-2 Assignment of instances to microwave radio channels................................................ 17-2

17.4 SISA0 functional group ..................................................................................................... 17-3 17.4.1 Application functions ..................................................................................................... 17-3 17.4.2 Alarm information.......................................................................................................... 17-3 17.5 RTF-1 functional group ..................................................................................................... 17-4 17.5.1 Application functions ..................................................................................................... 17-4 17.5.2 Alarm information.......................................................................................................... 17-4 17.5.3 Configuration................................................................................................................. 17-5 17.5.4 Performance measuring points..................................................................................... 17-5 17.5.5 User data ...................................................................................................................... 17-5 17.6 RTFE-1 functional group ................................................................................................... 17-6 17.6.1 Application functions ..................................................................................................... 17-6 17.6.2 Alarm information.......................................................................................................... 17-6 17.6.3 Configuration................................................................................................................. 17-7 17.6.4 Performance measuring points..................................................................................... 17-7 17.6.5 User data ...................................................................................................................... 17-7 17.7 RRTF-1 functional group................................................................................................... 17-8 17.7.1 Application functions ..................................................................................................... 17-8 17.7.2 Alarm information.......................................................................................................... 17-8 17.7.3 Configuration................................................................................................................. 17-9 17.7.4 Performance measuring points..................................................................................... 17-9 17.7.5 User data ...................................................................................................................... 17-9 17.8 RX functional group......................................................................................................... 17-10 17.8.1 Application functions ................................................................................................... 17-10 17.8.2 Alarm information........................................................................................................ 17-10 17.8.3 Configuration............................................................................................................... 17-11 17.8.4 Measuring values........................................................................................................ 17-11 RF/160 OI V

Contents

Operating Instructions

17.9 RX functional group for hot standby configurations ................................................... 17-12 17.9.1 Application functions ................................................................................................... 17-12 17.9.2 Alarm information........................................................................................................ 17-12 17.9.3 Configuration............................................................................................................... 17-13 17.9.4 Measuring values........................................................................................................ 17-13 17.10 TX functional group ......................................................................................................... 17-14 17.10.1 Application functions ............................................................................................... 17-14 17.10.2 Alarm information .................................................................................................... 17-14 17.10.3 Configuration ........................................................................................................... 17-15 17.10.4 Measuring values .................................................................................................... 17-15 17.11 TX functional group for equipment protection (hot standby) ..................................... 17-16 17.11.1 Application functions ............................................................................................... 17-16 17.11.2 Alarm information .................................................................................................... 17-16 17.11.3 Configuration ........................................................................................................... 17-17 17.11.4 Measuring values .................................................................................................... 17-17 17.12 PSU functional group ...................................................................................................... 17-18 17.12.1 Application functions ............................................................................................... 17-18 17.12.2 Alarm information .................................................................................................... 17-18 17.12.3 Configuration ........................................................................................................... 17-19 17.12.4 Performance measuring points ............................................................................... 17-19 17.13 SCU functional group ...................................................................................................... 17-20 17.13.1 Mapping service channels onto SCU instances and channels ............................... 17-20 17.13.2 Application functions ............................................................................................... 17-21 17.13.3 Alarm information .................................................................................................... 17-21 17.13.4 Configuration ........................................................................................................... 17-21 17.14 ME functional group ........................................................................................................ 17-22 17.14.1 Application functions ............................................................................................... 17-22 17.14.2 General.................................................................................................................... 17-22

18 Annex 3: Co-channel Operation with XPIC ............................... 18-1


18.1 18.2 18.3 General ................................................................................................................................ 18-1 Functioning of a CCDP system ........................................................................................ 18-1 Behaviour in case of radio hop failures........................................................................... 18-1

18.4 Behaviour in case of equipment failures......................................................................... 18-2 18.4.1 Tx-side failure ............................................................................................................... 18-2 18.4.2 Rx-side failure ............................................................................................................... 18-3 18.4.3 Failure of the ATPC control channel............................................................................. 18-4

VI

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions

Figures

Figures
Fig. 1-1: Fig. 1-2: Fig. 1-3: Fig. 1-4: Fig. 1-5: Fig. 1-6: Fig. 1-7: Fig. 2-1: Fig. 2-2: Fig. 2-3: Fig. 2-4: Fig. 2-5: Fig. 2-6: Fig. 2-7: Fig. 2-8: Fig. 2-9: Fig. 2-10: Fig. 2-11: Fig. 2-12: Fig. 2-13: Fig. 4-1: Fig. 4-2: Fig. 4-3: Fig. 4-4: Fig. 4-5: Fig. 4-6: Fig. 4-7: Fig. 4-8: Fig. 4-9: Fig. 4-10: Fig. 10-1: Fig. 10-2: Fig. 10-3: Fig. 10-4: Fig. 10-5: Fig. 10-6: Fig. 10-7: Fig. 11-1: Fig. 11-2: RF/160 OI DC port Sub-D , 3-pin, male .......................................................................................... 1-1 Rack installation............................................................................................................. 1-2 Protective grounding point ........................................................................................... 1-2 Bracelet contacts ........................................................................................................... 1-3 Laser warning label........................................................................................................ 1-4 Optical interface module SPI ........................................................................................ 1-5 RF interfaces .................................................................................................................. 1-6 Card slots in the system rack ....................................................................................... 2-1 Channel positions for n+0............................................................................................. 2-6 Channel positions for n+0 with XPIC ........................................................................... 2-6 Channel positions for n+1............................................................................................. 2-7 Channel positions for n+1 with XPIC ........................................................................... 2-7 Channel positions - type A for n+2 with XPIC............................................................. 2-8 Channel positions - type B for n+2 with XPIC............................................................. 2-8 LON bus 6+2 XPIC........................................................................................................ 2-11 LON bus 14+2 XPIC...................................................................................................... 2-11 CAN bus 6+2 XPIC ....................................................................................................... 2-12 CAN bus 14+2 XPIC ..................................................................................................... 2-12 SOH ............................................................................................................................... 2-13 Utilization of media-specific SOH bytes .................................................................... 2-14 DPU/RPS STM-1 front panel........................................................................................ 4-44 Locking of PR1 ............................................................................................................. 4-46 Switching from OP1 to PR2 ........................................................................................ 4-47 Switching Tx1 to the antenna ..................................................................................... 4-48 Switching Tx2 to the antenna ..................................................................................... 4-49 Service channels in the OHAU ................................................................................... 4-52 RFCOH wayside interface 75 Ohm ............................................................................. 4-64 RFCOH wayside interface 120 Ohm ........................................................................... 4-65 SOH Access Module Interface 75 Ohm.................................................................... 4-107 SOH Access Module Interface 120 Ohm.................................................................. 4-108 Transmitter (Tx)............................................................................................................ 10-1 Main and diversity receiver (Rx/RxD)......................................................................... 10-2 RPS-C ............................................................................................................................ 10-3 RPS-H ............................................................................................................................ 10-4 MU subrack................................................................................................................... 10-5 OHAU subrack (depicted with QD2 interface module)............................................. 10-6 OHAU subrack (depicted with ECC Gateway module)............................................. 10-7 ITU-R F.382 ................................................................................................................... 11-1 ITU-R F.382 China ........................................................................................................ 11-2 VII

Figures Fig. 11-3: Fig. 11-4: Fig. 11-5: Fig. 11-6: Fig. 11-7: Fig. 11-8: Fig. 11-9:

Operating Instructions ITU-R F.382 (OIRT) ....................................................................................................... 11-3 ITU-R F.497 sim. Russia .............................................................................................. 11-4 ITU-R F.635 A1.............................................................................................................. 11-5 ITU-R F.635 A1 5a sim. ................................................................................................ 11-6 ITU-R F.1099 A1............................................................................................................ 11-7 ITU-R F.1099 A1 3 sim. ................................................................................................ 11-8 ITU-R F.497 Russia....................................................................................................... 11-9

Fig. 11-10: ITU-R F.383 ................................................................................................................. 11-10 Fig. 11-11: ITU-R F.384 ................................................................................................................. 11-11 Fig. 11-12: ITU-R F. 385 A1 + alt. ................................................................................................. 11-12 Fig. 11-13: ITU-R F.385 A3............................................................................................................ 11-13 Fig. 11-14: ITU-R F.385 A4............................................................................................................ 11-14 Fig. 11-15: ITU-R F.386 A1............................................................................................................ 11-15 Fig. 11-16: ITU-R F.386 A3 sim..................................................................................................... 11-16 Fig. 11-17: ITU-R F.386 A4............................................................................................................ 11-17 Fig. 11-18: ITU-R F.497 ................................................................................................................. 11-18 Fig. 13-1: Fig. 17-1: Fig. 17-2: Fig. 18-1: Fig. 18-2: Fig. 18-3: OHAU block diagram ................................................................................................. 13-15 QD2 view of a microwave radio terminal (left) or regenerator station (right) ........ 17-1 MDRS 155 E-2+0(left) and 1+1conf. with occasional traffic (right) ......................... 17-1 Block diagram of a CCDP system .............................................................................. 18-1 Equipment failure on the transmit side (V) ............................................................... 18-2 Equipment failure on the receive side (V) ................................................................. 18-3

VIII

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions

Key Words

Key words
Key word 2-1: Key word 2-2: Key word 4-1: Key word 4-2: Key word 4-3: Key word 4-4: Key word 4-5: Key word 4-6: Key word 4-7: Key word 4-8: Key word 4-9: Setting Modem Unit addresses ............................................................................ 2-9 Setting RPSC addresses..................................................................................... 2-10 Activating the Tx XPIC .......................................................................................... 4-4 Adjusting the Tx power......................................................................................... 4-4 Activating the ATPC Tx........................................................................................ 4-4 Adjusting the Tx ATPC holding time ................................................................... 4-5 RF band position Tx ........................................................................................... 4-6 Requesting the Tx oscillator frequency .............................................................. 4-7 Activating the Rx XPIC.......................................................................................... 4-9 Activating the Rx ATPC ........................................................................................ 4-9 Adjusting the Rx ATPC reference level............................................................. 4-10

Key word 4-10: Adjusting the Rx ATPC holding time................................................................. 4-10 Key word 4-11: RF band position - Rx ......................................................................................... 4-11 Key word 4-12: Requesting the Rx oscillator frequency............................................................ 4-12 Key word 4-13: Adjusting the RxD modulation ........................................................................... 4-14 Key word 4-14: Delay time compensation in space diversity configurations.......................... 4-16 Key word 4-15: Activating the MD XPIC....................................................................................... 4-22 Key word 4-16: Unmodulated IF carrier ....................................................................................... 4-22 Key word 4-17: Activating the DM XPIC....................................................................................... 4-24 Key word 4-18: Adjusting the DM group delay equalizer........................................................... 4-24 Key word 4-19: Defining the OP and PR channel no. ................................................................. 4-28 Key word 4-20: BB/IF Loopback ................................................................................................... 4-30 Key word 4-21: Switching thresholds .......................................................................................... 4-32 Key word 4-22: HSB equipment protection ................................................................................. 4-35 Key word 4-23: Radio hop identifier............................................................................................. 4-38 Key word 4-24: SOH processing................................................................................................... 4-39 Key word 4-25: Activating the service channel........................................................................... 4-41 Key word 4-26: Manual protection switching .............................................................................. 4-44 Key word 4-27: Selecting RFCOH with 4x64 k............................................................................. 4-58 Key word 4-28: DSC1 assignment in the RFCOH: EOW, QTN or External ............................... 4-58 Key word 4-29: Defining the RFCOH 4x64 k protection switching option ............................... 4-59 Key word 4-30: Selecting the alarm display for RFCOH 4x64 k ................................................ 4-59 Key word 4-31: Selecting RFCOH with 8x64 k............................................................................. 4-60 Key word 4-32: Defining protection switching options for RFCOH 8x64 k .............................. 4-60 Key word 4-33: Selecting the alarm display for RFCOH 8x64 k ................................................ 4-61 Key word 4-34: Activating the 2048 k WSC in the RFCOH......................................................... 4-62 Key word 4-35: Defining the 2048 k WSC protection switching option in the RFCOH ........... 4-62 Key word 4-36: Selecting the alarm display of the 2048 k WSC in the RFCOH ....................... 4-63 Key word 4-37: Setting RFCOH wayside interface 75 Ohm ....................................................... 4-64 RF/160 OI IX

Key Words

Operating Instructions

Key word 4-38: Setting RFCOH wayside interface 120 Ohm ..................................................... 4-65 Key word 4-39: Selecting 2/6-wire PSTN inteface of the EOW .................................................. 4-66 Key word 4-40: Transmitting or blocking the EOW .................................................................... 4-67 Key word 4-41: Defining the clock source of the EOW .............................................................. 4-67 Key word 4-42: Defining the level of the PSTN port ................................................................... 4-68 Key word 4-43: Selecting the clock source for EOW branching ............................................... 4-68 Key word 4-44: Configuring QD2/SISA-K..................................................................................... 4-69 Key word 4-45: Selecting the 64-k transmission channel for the Q-signal .............................. 4-72 Key word 4-46: Configuring the ECC Gateway Module.............................................................. 4-73 Key word 4-47: Selecting the 2048 k WSC interface in the SOH ............................................... 4-90 Key word 4-48: DPU STM-1 address ............................................................................................ 4-90 Key word 4-49: Selecting 4x64k service channels West in the SOH ........................................ 4-91 Key word 4-50: Selecting RPS options for 4x64 k West in the SOH ......................................... 4-91 Key word 4-51: Selecting the alarm display for 4x64 k West in the SOH ................................. 4-92 Key word 4-52: Selecting 4x64k service channels East in the SOH ......................................... 4-93 Key word 4-53: Selecting the alarm display for 4x64 k East in the SOH .................................. 4-94 Key word 4-54: Selecting RPS options for 2048 k WSC West in the SOH................................ 4-95 Key word 4-55: Selecting the alarm display for 2048 k WSC West in the SOH........................ 4-96 Key word 4-56: Selecting RPS options for 2048 k WSC East in the SOH................................. 4-97 Key word 4-57: Selecting the alarm display for 2048 k WSC East in the SOH......................... 4-98 Key word 4-58: Occupying 64-k service channel E1 West in the SOH ..................................... 4-99 Key word 4-59: Selecting RPS options for 64-k service channel E1 West in the SOH ........... 4-99 Key word 4-60: Selecting the alarm display for 64-k service channel E1 West in the SOH . 4-100 Key word 4-61: Occupying 64-k service channel E1 East in the SOH .................................... 4-101 Key word 4-62: Selecting RPS options for 64-k service channel E1 East in the SOH .......... 4-101 Key word 4-63: Selecting the alarm display for 64-k service channel E1 East in the SOH .. 4-102 Key word 4-64: Occupying 64-k service channel F1 West in the SOH .................................. 4-103 Key word 4-65: Selecting RPS options for 64-k service channel F1 West in the SOH ......... 4-103 Key word 4-66: Selecting the alarm display for 64-k service channel F1 West in the SOH . 4-104 Key word 4-67: Occupying 64-k service channel F1 East in the SOH .................................... 4-105 Key word 4-68: Selecting RPS options for 64-k service channel F1 East in the SOH .......... 4-105 Key word 4-69: Selecting the alarm display for 64-k service channel F1 East in the SOH .. 4-106 Key word 4-70: Setting SOH wayside interface 75 Ohm .......................................................... 4-107 Key word 4-71: Setting SOH wayside interface 120 Ohm ........................................................ 4-108 Key word 4-72: Occupying 64-k service channel D1 West in the SOH................................... 4-109 Key word 4-73: Selecting RPS options for DCC service channel West in the SOH .............. 4-110 Key word 4-74: Selecting the alarm display for DCC service channel West in the SOH ...... 4-110 Key word 4-75: Occupying the DCC service channel East in the SOH .................................. 4-111 Key word 4-76: Selecting RPS options for DCC service channel East in the SOH ............... 4-112 Key word 4-77: Occupying 64-k service channel E2 West in the SOH ................................... 4-113 Key word 4-78: Selecting RPS options for 64-k service channel E2 West in the SOH ......... 4-113 X RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions

Key Words

Key word 4-79: Selecting the alarm display for 64-k service channel E2 West in the SOH . 4-113 Key word 4-80: Occupying 64-k service channel E2 East in the SOH .................................... 4-114 Key word 4-81: Selecting RPS options for 64-k service channel E2 East in the SOH .......... 4-114 Key word 4-82: Selecting the alarm display for 64-k serv. channel E2 West in the SOH ..... 4-114 Key word 13-1: Rx/RxD recorder port .......................................................................................... 13-4

Note:
Some of the systems depicted in this document include options which do not belong to the normal delivery scope and have to be explicitly ordered. Modifications of technical contents and characteristics reserved.

RF/160-B

XI

Key Words This page has been left blank for editorial reasons.

Operating Instructions

XII

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions

Abbreviations

Abbreviations
A ACAP ACDP ADR AIS ATDE ATN ATPC AU-AIS BAT BB BER CALL CAN CBN CCDP CL CP CR CRC DCC DCCR DCCM DFM DIPL DIV DK DM DPU DRS DSC DTMF DTN EA PS EA RU EA Rx EA Tx ECC EMC EMI EOW ESD EXATN EXT SET FD FEC FP HF HSB IF IM INT-A INT-B LA Rx LA Tx LA/EA Rx LA-Tx-BIT Adjacent-Channel Alternate-Polarized (corresponds to ACDP mode) Adjacent Channel Dual-Polarized (corresponds to ACAP mode) Address Alarm Indication Signal Adaptive Time Domain Equalizer Analog Terminal Network Automatic Transmit Power Control Administrative Unit AIS Battery Input (DC) Baseband Bit Error Ratio Call Controller Area Network Channel Branching Network Co-Channel Dual-Polarized Clock Connection Panel Clock Reference Cyclic Redundancy Check Data Communication Channel DCC of the RSOH DCC of the MSOH Dispersive Fading Margin Diplexer Diversity Service Channel Demodulator Data Processing Unit Digital Microwave Radio System Digital Service Channel Dual Tone Multiple Frequency Digital Terminal Network Equipment Alarm PS Equipment Alarm RU Equipment Alarm Rx Equipment Alarm Tx Embedded Control Channels Electromagnetic Compatibility Electromagnetic Interference Engineer Orderwire Electrostatic Discharge Extension Analog Termination Network Extended Handset Frequency Diversity Forward Error Correction Fuse Panel High Frequency Hot Standby Intermediate Frequency Interface Module Internal Trouble of the module - Major alarm Internal Trouble of the module - Minor alarm Line Alarm Rx Line Alarm Tx Line and Equipment Alarm Rx Line Alarm - Tx Bit XIII

B C

F H I

RF/160 OI

Abbreviations

Operating Instructions

Q R

S XIV

LMT LOF LON LOP LOS LSS MAINS MAP MD MLQAM MS-AIS MSOH MSP MST MU NC NE NFD NO O&M OH OHA OOF OP OSC OT PCB PDH PI POWER PR PS PSTN PSU QAM QMP RBER RC RDI REI RF RFCOH ROW RPS RPSC RPSI RRR RRTF RRTR RSL RSOH RST RTF RTFE RTTF RU Rx RxD SAW

Local Maintenance Terminal Loss Of Frame Local Operator Network Loss Of Pointer Loss Of Signal Loss Of Sequence Synchronization Mains Power Mapping Function Modulator Multilevel Quadrature Amplitude Modulation Multiplex Section AIS Multiplex Section Overhead Multiplex Section Protection Multiplex Section Termination Modem Unit Normally Closed Network Element Net Filter Discrimination Normally Open Operation and Maintenance Overhead Overhead Access Out Of Frame Operating Channel Oscillator Occasional Traffic Printed Circuit Board Plesiochronous Digital Hierarchy Physical Interface Power Protection Channel Power Supply Public Subscriber Terminal Network Protection Switching Unit Quadrature Amplitude Modulation Performance Measuring Point Residual Bit Error Ratio Remote Control Remote Defect Indication Remote Error Indication Radio Frequency Radio Frame Complementary Overhead Regenerator Order Wire Radio Protection Switching Radio Protection Switching Central Unit Radio Protection Switching Interface Radio Relay Regenerator Radio Regenerator Transport Function Radio Relay Terminal Receiver Signal Level Regenerator Section Overhead Regenerator Section Termination Regenerator Transport Function Regenerator Transport Function Electrical Radio Terminal Transport Function Radio Unit Receiver Diversity Receiver Surface Acoustic Wave RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions

Abbreviations

U W X

SCU SD SDH SNCP SNMP SOA SOH SOHA SOL SPB SPI SPI EL SPI OPT STM T3 TIM TMN TSE TTF Tx USER WAY XIF XPD XPE XPI XPIC

Service Channel Unit Space Diversity Synchronous Digital Hierarchy Sub-Network Connection Protection Simple Network Management Protocol ServiceOn Access Section Overhead Section Overhead Access Start Of Life value Synchronous Port Block Synchronous Port Interface Synchronous Port Interface - Electrical Synchronous Port Interface - Optical Synchronous Transport Module Clock Input 2048 k Trace Identifier Mismatch Telecommunication Management Network Test Sequence Error Terminal Transport Function Transmitter User Port Wayside Traffic Cross-Polarization Improvement Factor Cross-Polarization Decoupling Cross-Polarization Equalizer Cross-Polarization Interference Cross-Polarization Interference Canceller

RF/160 OI

XV

Abbreviations This page has been left blank for editorial reasons.

Operating Instructions

XVI

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions

Safety Instructions

1 Safety Instructions
1.1 Application
These microwave radio systems are designed to meet environment class 3.2 as defined in ETS 300 019. This class specifies system applications in partly temperature-controlled rooms (-5 C to +45 C, max. 95% relative humidity). The systems may be used only under the conditions and for the purpose for which they have been developed. For more detailed information, please refer to the Technical characteristics indicated in the Operator Manual. Installation and Service works may be executed only by technically trained and experienced staff knowing the hazards that can occur and the measures to be taken for minimizing any danger for themselves and third parties. Please note all warnings and instructions contained in this Manual. Only service staff should be granted access to the active system. Do not use any installation materials (screws, nuts etc.) different from those supplied with the equipment or recommended by the manufacturer. Use appropriate safety devices while you are working on top of or near the mast. The system may be installed and operated only in locations with restricted access.

1.2

Protection class

The DRS 155/...-64/128 MLQAM E system meets protection class IEC IP 20.

1.3

Operating voltage

The Tx, Rx, MU PS and OHAU PS modules of the microwave radio system can be operated in the voltage range from 19 V to 75 V DC. The voltage input is floating, i.e. either the positive pole (standard) or the negative pole can be grounded. The standard cables used for setting up the connection to the power box (distributor) are dimensioned for the voltage ranges of 48 V and 60 V. Thicker cable cross-sections are required for 24 V. Before switching on the power supply, please check that the operating voltage and supply voltage are identical and that the polarity is correct (Fig. 1-1).

BAT 19...75 V DC

Fig. 1-1:

DC port Sub-D , 3-pin, male

Ensure that the power supply has been switched off before you plug in or pull out any module connecting cables. This applies to both control and operating voltage cables of the Modem Unit, OHAU as well as Tx and Rx modules. If the RPSI module is pulled out or plugged in live, transmission faults may occur in the protection channel. Ensure that the following conditions are fullfilled: 1. No operating channel must be protection-switched. 2. The protection switching function must have been enabled or 3. the links between the corresponding RPSI and RPS-C modules must have been cut. The following modules may be inserted in or extracted from the subrack only with the power supply switched off: Modulator = Mod/MD (in Modem Unit) Demodulator = Demod/DM (in Modem Unit) SOH Access (in OHAU) Power Supply = PS (in OHAU & Modem Unit)

RF/160 OI

1-1

Safety Instructions

Operating Instructions

For safety reasons, we always recommend to switch off the corresponding power supply unit at the fuse panel before you extract or insert a module! The automatic circuit breakers must be located in the feeder line of the ungrounded pole. With the standard fuse sockets of Power Box II, the system may be operated only using batteries with the positive pole grounded.

1.4

Rack installation

The system racks (ETSI or 19) must be protected from tipping over by screwing the clips (Fig. 1-2) to the wall or ceiling using appropriate securing material. For more detailed information, please refer to the Installation Manual.

Fig. 1-2: Rack installation

1.5

Rack grounding

The racks must be grounded at the protective grounding point located in the top section of the rear rack upright (Fig. 1-3) using a protective conductor (16 mm). The individual modules are grounded via the metal rails of the subracks and rack. For further instructions, please refer to the Installation Manual.

M8

Fig. 1-3: Protective grounding point

1-2

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions

Safety Instructions

1.6

ESD protection

The system rack is equipped with two grounding points (Fig. 1-4) with a 10 mm snap fastener for connecting a grounding bracelet. By grounding the wrist, it is possible to avoid electrostatic discharges that could destroy sensitive electronic components when touching the modules.

Ea rth Bo nd in g Po in t

Ea rth Bo nd in g Po in t

10 mm

E arth B onding P oint

Fig. 1-4: Bracelet contacts

RF/160 OI

1-3

Safety Instructions

Operating Instructions

1.7

Laser safety

The Modem Unit can be optionally equipped with two optical modules (SPI) (Fig. 1-6). The laser used meets LASER CLASS 1 (Fig. 1-5) as defined by EN 60825-1.

Fig. 1-5: Laser warning label

The laser complies with ITU-T G.957 and features the following characteristics:
S-1.1 1310 nm -8...-15 dBm 6.43 ns approx. 23 L-1.1 1310 nm 0...-5 dBm 6.43 ns approx. 23

Wavelength Output power Pulse duration Beam divergence

The module is automatically deactivated by an ALS (Automatic Laser Shutdown) circuit as soon as the optical input signal fails (e.g. in case of a cable break). In case of a loss of signal of the SPI, the laser is alternately activated for 2 seconds and deactivated for 70 seconds. Besides this automatic testing routine, it is also possible to switch on the laser manually for 2 seconds or 90 seconds. After expiry of the corresponding period, the system returns to the previous testing cycle.

Maintenance and repair works must be executed by qualified service personnel.

The laser source emits invisible laser radiation. Laser beams may lead to irreparable eye injuries. Never look into the laser source or onto the connector surface of FO cables connected, not even with optical instruments.

CAUTION!

Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure.

1-4

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions

Safety Instructions

Ea rth Bo nd in g Po in t

Ea rth Bo nd in g Po in t

BOSCH

RPSC

SPI

STM-1

Fig. 1-6: Optical interface module SPI

RF/160 OI

1-5

Safety Instructions

Operating Instructions

1.8

RF interfaces

When opening the RF interfaces (waveguides or semi-rigid cables) while the transmitters are active, microwave radiation is emitted which may lead to health hazards. In addition, this can lead to RF interferences in neighbouring units. Do not look into open waveguide connections and do not stand in front of transmit antennas.

Warnung :

Nicht die Hohlleiterverbindungen ffnen bevor die Sender ausgeschaltet sind. Mikrowellenstrahlung kann gesundheitsschdlich sein, besonders fr die Augen. Ebenso knnen Gertestrungen verursacht werden. Do not open waveguide joints without switching off the transmitter. Stray RF power is harmful to the body (particulary to the eyes) and can also cause RF interference.

Warning :

Fig. 1-7: RF interfaces

The SMA connectors of the coaxial cables between the Tx modules, Rx modules and channel branching networks may only be tightened with a torque of approx. 60 Ncm. A higher torque would slacken the SMA connectors at the RF filters when opening the joint. This would lead to a change of the filter characteristic.

1-6

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions

Rack Configuration

2 Rack Configuration
The card slots for the individual modules are numbered in the system racks 0, 1...4. The modules to be mounted in these card slots are preconfigured in the factory to the customer-specific requirements. On site, the modules must be installed in the corresponding card slots in accordance with the configuration lists included in the delivery scope to ensure that all functions adjusted are correctly fulfilled.

000 100 101 111

001 - 004 005 - 008 102 112 103 113 104 114

200 220 222 212 213 214 215 2 2 207 208 209 210 2 0 1 1 202 203 204 205 300 301 311 302 312 305 010 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 9 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 0 1 2 0 500
5 0 1 5 0 2

216 211 206

303 313

304 314

400
4 0 1 4 0 2

414 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1
4 1 2 4 1 3

514 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1
5 1 2 5 1 3

Fig. 2-1: Card slots in the system rack

RF/160 OI

2-1

Rack Configuration

Operating Instructions

Rack 1...4 Card slot 001...004 005...008 100 101...104 111...114 200 220 221 222 201 202 203

Ident no.

Designation

Filter type

Manufact. no.

204

205

206 207 208 209

210

211 212 213 214

215

216

ETSI rack ETSI adaption set Rx cabinet Rx / RxD Oscillator Branching cabinet Cover branching Flexible coaxial cable Flexible coaxial cable, div. RF connecting unit RF filter Tx RF filter Tx Termination RF filter Tx Termination Waveguide RF filter Tx Termination Waveguide Termination Waveguide RF filter Rx RF filter Rx Termination RF filter Rx Termination Waveguide RF filter Rx Termination Waveguide Termination Waveguide RF filter RxD RF filter RxD Termination RF filter RxD Termination Waveguide RF filter RxD Termination Waveguide Termination Waveguide

2-2

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions

Rack Configuration

Rack 1...4 Card slot 300 301...302 311...314 305 400 401

Ident no.

Designation

Filter type

Manufact. no.

402 403 404 405 406 407 408 409 410 411 412 413 414

500 501 502 503 504 505 506 507 508 509 510 511

Tx cabinet Tx Oscillator Rack fan Subrack modem unit Cover RPSI RPSI SPI electrical interface SPI optical interface Modem unit power supply Modulator DPU/RPS STM-1 Controller module Demodulator Demodulator DPU/RPS STM-1 Modulator Modem unit power supply Cover RPSI RPSI SPI electrical interface SPI optical interface Cover RPSC RPSC RPSH Subrack modem unit Cover RPSI RPSI SPI electrical interface SPI optical interface Modem unit power supply Modulator DPU/RPS STM-1 Controller module Demodulator Demodulator DPU/RPS STM-1 Modulator Modem unit power supply

RF/160 OI

2-3

Rack Configuration

Operating Instructions

Rack 0 Card slot 512

Ident no.

Designation

Filter type

Manufact. no.

513 514

Cover RPSI RPSI SPI electrical interface SPI optical interface Cover RPSC RPSC RPSH

Rack 0 Card slot 000 010 011

Ident no.

Designation

Filter type

Manufact. no.

012 013 014 015 016 017 018 019 020 021

ETSI rack infrastucture Subrack OHA unit Cover CP OHAU Handset OHAU OHAU power supply Cover RFCOH access mod. RFCOH Access Module Cover RFCOH access mod. RFCOH Access Module Cover Q-interface module QD2 interface module Cover EOW module EOW module Cover EOW module EOW module SOH Access Module Cover SOH ext. module SOH extension module Cover SISA SISA-0/N Cover CP OHAU Handset OHAU

2-4

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions

Rack Configuration

Rack 1...4

Filter frequencies
Example:

MHz
207 f1 202 f1

MHz 7554 MHz 7708 MHz

MHz MHz MHz

MHz RxD MHz Rx MHz Tx

7498 MHz 207 f2 7652 MHz 202 f2 [m] above sea level

Altitude:.....

f1

f2

f1

f1

f2

f1

Type A

Type B

With 64 MLQAM, two adjacent RF channels (e.g. ch. 1 and ch. 2) can be tuned in an RF diplexer. With 128 MLQAM, two RF channels separated by another channel (e.g. ch. 1 and ch. 3) can be tuned in an RF diplexer. If - with 128 MLQAM - two adjacent channels (e.g. 1 and 2) are used, two separate RF filters must be provided. With 64 MLQAM, the position of each Tx filter and its far-end Rx filter in the channel branching network is freely selectable. With 128 MLQAM, the position of each Tx filter and its far-end Rx filter in the channel branching network is not freely selectable. The arrangement of Rx filters in the Rx section must be reversed compared to the arrangement of Tx filters in the Tx section.

RF/160 OI

2-5

Rack Configuration

Operating Instructions

2.1

Channel positions

OP1

OP2

OP3

OP4

OP5

OP6

OP7

OP8

OP1

OP2

OP5

OP6

OP3

OP4

OP7

OP8

Fig. 2-2: Channel positions for n+0

OP1

OP3

OP5

OP7

OP9 OP11 OP13 OP15

OP2

OP4

OP6

OP8

OP10 OP12 OP14 OP16

OP1

OP2

OP9

OP10

OP3

OP4

OP11

OP12

OP5

OP6

OP13

OP14

OP7

OP8

OP15

OP16

Fig. 2-3: Channel positions for n+0 with XPIC

2-6

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions

Rack Configuration

OP1

PR1

OP2

OP3

OP4

OP5

OP6

OP7

RPSC

OP1

PR1

OP4

OP5

OP2

OP3

OP6

OP7

Fig. 2-4: Channel positions for n+1

OP1

OP2

OP4

OP6

OP8 OP10 OP12 OP14

PR1

OP3

OP5

OP7

OP9

OP11 OP13

RPSC #1

OP1

PR1

OP8

OP9

OP2

OP3

OP10

OP11

RPSC #2

OP4

OP5

OP12

OP13

OP6

OP7

OP14

Fig. 2-5: Channel positions for n+1 with XPIC

RF/160 OI

2-7

Rack Configuration

Operating Instructions

OP1

OP2

OP3

OP5

OP7

OP9 OP11 OP13

PR1

PR2

OP4

OP6

OP8

OP10 OP12 OP14

RPSC #1

RPSC #3

OP1

PR1

OP7

OP8

OP2

PR2

OP9

OP10

RPSC #2

RPSC #4

OP3

OP4

OP11

OP12

OP5

OP6

OP13

OP14

Fig. 2-6: Channel positions - type A for n+2 with XPIC

PR1

OP1

OP3

OP5

OP7

OP9 OP11 OP13

PR2

OP2

OP4

OP6

OP8

OP10 OP12 OP14

RPSC #1

RPSC #3

PR1

PR2

OP7

OP8

OP3

OP4

OP9

OP10

RPSC #2

RPSC #4

OP1

OP2

OP11

OP12

OP5

OP6

OP13

OP14

Fig. 2-7: Channel positions - type B for n+2 with XPIC

2-8

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions

Rack Configuration

2.2

Modem Unit addresses


Key word 2-1: Setting Modem Unit addresses

Each modem unit (MU) in a n+m configuration must have its own address. The definition of OP1...16 or PR1/2 will be determined by these addresses which are adjustable at Sub-D address connector X77 in each MU. Bits A0...A5 define the address of the left part of the MU, while bits B0...B5 define the address of the right part of the MU. Bits A5/B5 define the direction.

A5/B5

A4/B4

A3/B3

A2/B2

A1/B1

A0/B0

HEX

Channel

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 1

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0

0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0

0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1

1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0

01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 0A 0B 0C 0D 0E 0F 10 12 12

OP1 OP2 OP3 OP4 OP5 OP6 OP7 OP8 OP9 OP10 OP11 OP12 OP13 OP14 OP15 OP16 PR1 PR2 West East

After making new settings or modifying addresses at the address connector, all modules connected must be reset to ensure a secure adoption of the new addresses.

RF/160 OI

2-9

Rack Configuration

Operating Instructions

2.3

RPSC addresses
Key word 2-2: Setting RPSC addresses

In n+1and n+2 system configurations, each RPSC must have a separate address, which can be selected by means of switch S1 on the rear side of the RPSC. In configurations with more than 7+1 channels, two to four RPSCs are arranged in a cascade.

ADR

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

PR1 PR2 PR1 PR2 PR1 PR2 PR1 PR2

West West West West East East East East

Cascade Cascade

Cascade Cascade

2-10

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions

Rack Configuration

2.4

LON and CAN system bus

RPSC

OHAU

MU

MU

RPSC

MU

MU

Fig. 2-8:

LON bus 6+2 XPIC

RPSC

RPSC

OHAU

MU

MU

MU

MU

RPSC

RPSC

MU

MU

MU

MU

Fig. 2-9:

LON bus 14+2 XPIC

RF/160 OI

2-11

Rack Configuration

Operating Instructions

RPSC

MU

MU

RPSC

MU

MU

Fig. 2-10:

CAN bus 6+2 XPIC

RPSC

RPSC

MU

MU

MU

MU

RPSC

RPSC

MU

MU

MU

MU

Fig. 2-11:

CAN bus 14+2 XPIC

2-12

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions

Rack Configuration

2.5

STM-1 Section Overhead (SOH)

A1

A1

A1

A2

A2

A2

J0

RSOH

B1

RF1

RF2

E1

F1

D1

RF3

RF4

D2

D3

Pointer

B2

B2

B2

K1

K2

D4

D5

D6

MSOH

D7

D8

D9

D10

D11

D12

S1

M1

E2

Standardized bytes A1, A2 B1, B2 J0 D1 - D3 D4 - D12 E1 E2 F1 K1, K2 S1 M1 Synchronization (A1: 11110110; A2: 00101000) Performance Regenerator Section Trace (Path ID) Data Communication Channel (DCCR) Data Communication Channel (DCCM) Regenerator EOW (64 kbit/s) Multiplex EOW (64 kbit/s or V.11) Data Channel (64 kbit/s) Bytes for Multiplex Section Protection (MSP) Timing Marker Multiplex Section Remote Error Indication (MS-REI)

Media-specific bytes RF1 RF2 RF3 RF4 4-bit line ID, LA Tx bit, ATPC bit, 1-bit HSB control or Tx level, 1-bit polarization ID 1 parity bit, 7-bit line error pulses 8-bit protection control RPS 8-bit B2 value transmission

Optional service channels (freely configurable bytes with B2 correction in the MSOH) 2112 kbit/s wayside channel (2048 kbit/s to ITU-T G.703) 288 kbit/s service channel (4x64 kbit/s, codirectional, to ITU-T G.703)

Fig. 2-12:

SOH

RF/160 OI

2-13

Rack Configuration

Operating Instructions

Media-specific byte RF1 1 Line ID 2 Line ID 3 Line ID 4 Line ID 5 LA TX bit 6 ATPC 7 HSB control or TX level 8 Polarization ID

Media-specific byte RF2 1 Line error pulse 2 Line error pulse 3 Line error pulse 4 Line error pulse 5 Line error pulse 6 Line error pulse 7 Line error pulse 8 Parity bit

Media-specific byte RF3 1 Protection control RPS 2 Protection control RPS 3 Protection control RPS 4 Protection control RPS 5 Protection control RPS 6 Protection control RPS 7 Protection control RPS 8 Protection control RPS

Media-specific byte RF4 1 B2 value transmission 2 B2 value transmission 3 B2 value transmission 4 B2 value transmission 5 B2 value transmission 6 B2 value transmission 7 B2 value transmission 8 B2 value transmission

Fig. 2-13:

Utilization of media-specific SOH bytes

2-14

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions

Starting the Service PC

3 Starting the Service PC


The present manual describes the system configurations based on the application software for the Service PC: DRS 155 E Version : 1.21

Application Software (MSP) Id. no.: AN00235704 Drawing no.: 65.7206.400.00-002 (contains Application Software (MSP) German and English Version).
Service PC (LMT/MSP)

The PC should meet the following minimum requirements: Pentium RAM Windows 133 MHz >16 MB 95/98

For system configuration, a laptop loaded with the SISA basic software (version 2.16) and application software DRS 155 E for SDH microwave radio systems is required. The PC is connected via a cable (Sub-D 9-pin, female, UNC --- Sub-D 9-pin, male, M3, 1:1) to the F-interface (RS 232) of the SISA module mounted in the OHAU subrack. This interface is adjusted to 9600 Baud/s, 8 data bits and even parity. For more detailed information on the SISA structure, please refer to the User Manual for the Modular Service PC. The SISA network driver and SISA network manager are now activated. Access to the User application is possible via the DRS 155 E button.

RF/160 OI

3-1

Starting the Service PC

Operating Instructions

3-2

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions

Configuration

4 Configuration
By selecting HW view Modules the 'Rack configuration' view is activated and can be used to access the individual modules. For identifying the modules, it is possible to activate the ID or Wink function via the following menu options: Mode Wink The LEDs on modules or module groups selected start to blink.

Any modification of the following system configurations are only activated after a system or module reset. SISA0N: DPU General: DPU General: Redundancy XPIC Redundancy

RF/160 OI

4-1

Configuration

Operating Instructions

4.1

General settings

4.1.1 Protection switching mode / Redundancy


The operating mode used must be identical in all DPUs of a microwave radio terminal (see section 4.7.8). For mapping the system into the QD2 information model, the SISA-0/N module must be appropriately configured for each terminal (see section 4.9.12).

4.1.2 XPIC
For XPIC operation, the following configuration settings must be made on all modules involved (Master: left MU half; Slave: right MU half):
Module DPU Option Master/Slave

XPIC XPIC XPIC XPIC RX oscillator RX oscillator XPIC TX oscillator TX oscillator

Modulator Demodulator Main Receiver Transmitter

Master/Slave Master/Slave Master/Slave Master Slave Master/Slave Master Slave

Remarks active After each modification, the DPU must be reset. active active active Only for alarm signalling Master Only for alarm signalling Slave active Only for alarm signalling Master Only for alarm signalling Slave

XPIC operation is not possible in the 1+1 hot standby and 1+1 line protection mode with only one DPU/RPS STM-1. For more details on co-channel operation with XPIC, see chapter 18.

4.1.3 ATPC
All setting options for ATPC are located on the Transmitter and Main Receiver modules.

4.1.4 STM-1 processing


The complete STM-1 processing can be configured in the DPU module.

4.1.5 Protection switching


All protection switching settings and monitoring functions are implemented in the DPU module.

4.1.6 Auxiliary channels


For using auxiliary channels transmitted in the SOH, the following settings must be made: 1. In the DPU, to which the corresponding OHAU is connected, access to the desired auxiliary channel must be activated (see section 4.7.8) 2. In the SOH or SOH Extension module, the corresponding auxiliary channel must be activated and its interface and protection switching options must be configured. Auxiliary channels in the RFCOH have to be configured only in the RFCOH Access Module. Section 4.9.1 gives a detailed overview of service channel options available.

4-2

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions

Configuration

4.2

Transmitter (Tx)

By selecting the module in the HW view

RF unit Transmitter Management Configuration the following Tx configuration window appears:

The parameters can then be modified by means of the following steps: Process Modify

RF/160 OI

4-3

Configuration

Operating Instructions

Key word 4-1:

Activating the Tx XPIC

General XPIC This option is activated in XPIC operation. In the Slave mode, the synchronization input of the oscillator is monitored by the Tx Slave. Tx oscillator Master In XPIC operation, the LO (DRVCO) of the transmitter operates as clock source (Master) for synchronizing the cross-polarly connected transmitter. In normal operation (without XPIC), the transmitters always operate as Master. Slave In XPIC operation, the LO (DRVCO) of the transmitter is synchronized by the cross-polarly connected transmitter (Master).

This setting is only used to enable or disable the XPIC sychronization alarm of the oscillator module.
Key word 4-2: Adjusting the Tx power

Tx RF output Power on The Tx output power can be switched on or off. Maximum level The following Tx power values can be adjusted: Nominal value Nominal value - 3 dB Nominal value - 6 dB Nominal value - 9 dB Nominal value +1.5 dB (ATPC enabled)

The overdrive mode is only active with the ATPC function enabled.

Setting in normal operation: Nominal value.

Key word 4-3:

Activating the ATPC Tx

4-4

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions

Configuration

ATPC Enable The transmit power is controlled by the ATPC circuit of the far-end receiver.

In order to avoid interferences in densely meshed networks or on links with difficult propagation conditions, the ATPC function must be active. More detailed data are obtained in the scope of radio hop planning. The maximum ATPC range is 20 dB / 19.5 dB / 16 dB. The minimum Tx power of +10.5 dBm (3 to 8 GHz) / +12 dBm (13 GHz) is not undershot.
Setting in normal operation: Active Actual state This option displays the status of ATPC control and of the control channel in the return direction. ATPC deactivated via configuration The ATPC is deactivated for operation with constant Tx power. Control loop switched off, error timer running The transmission channel for ATPC control information (Rx Tx) is interrupted and the error timer is running. The Tx output power is set to the maximum value until the service channel has been re-established or the timer has expired. Control loop switched off, error timer expired The transmission channel for ATPC control information (Rx Tx) is interrupted and the error timer has expired. The Tx output power is set to a user-defined value until the service channel has been re-established. Control active The Tx power is controlled by the far-end receiver (Rx).
Key word 4-4: Adjusting the Tx ATPC holding time

Error processing XPIC dependence When this option is active, XPIC operation is taken into account in case of ATPC errors. The output power of the cross-polar transmitter is controlled synchronously up to the expiry of the error timer. Error timer

In case of interruptions of ATPC control information transmission, an error timer is started. The Tx output power is set to its maximum value until transmission has been re-established or the timer has expired. The timer can be set to the following values:
8 s ...68 min Recommended setting : 4 min. (default value)

RF/160 OI

4-5

Configuration Tx level after error timer has expired The following values can be adjusted: Minimum value Nominal value - 14.5 dB Nominal value - 9.5 dB Nominal value - 4.5 dB Nominal value Recommended setting: Minimum value

Operating Instructions

Key word 4-5:

RF band position Tx

Band selection Band position The RF modules can be used for LB and UB operation. Underlaying The RF channel frequency lies below the oscillator frequency (-140 MHz). Overlaying The RF channel frequency lies above the oscillator frequency (+140 MHz). Subband

The selected RF bands are divided up into four subbands each. The channel frequency depends on the selected subband and the band position in the RF mixer. Also see chapter 12 Frequency Setting .
Lower subband 1 Lower subband 2 Lower subband 3 Lower subband 4 Upper subband 1 Upper subband 2 Upper subband 3 Upper subband 4

4-6

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions

Configuration

4.3

Tx oscillator
Key word 4-6: Requesting the Tx oscillator frequency

By selecting the module in the HW view, RF unit Tx oscillator Management Configuration the following Tx oscillator configuration window appears:

This mask displays the nominal oscillator frequency.

RF/160 OI

4-7

Configuration

Operating Instructions

4.4

Main receiver (Rx)

By selecting the module in the HW view, RF unit Main receiver Management Configuration the following Rx configuration window appears:

The parameters can then be modified by means of the following steps: Process Modify

4-8

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions

Configuration

Key word 4-7:

Activating the Rx XPIC

General XPIC active This option is activated in XPIC operation. In the Slave mode, the synchronization input of the oscillator is monitored by the Rx Slave. Rx oscillator Master In XPIC operation, the LO (DRVCO) of the receiver operates as clock source (Master) for synchronizing the cross-polarly connected receiver. In normal operation (without XPIC), the receiver operates as Master. Slave In XPIC operation, the LO (DRVCO) of the receiver is synchronized by the cross-polarly connected receiver (Master).

This setting is used only to enable or disable the XPIC synchronization alarm of the oscillator module.
IF amplifier Operating mode Normal Due to the low control time constant, the amplifier can react to rapid level fluctuations. Setting in normal operation: Normal Sweep The control time constant of the IF amplifier is increased. Thus, rapid level fluctuations are not compensated during a sweep measurement in order not to falsify the test result.
Key word 4-8: Activating the Rx ATPC

ATPC Manual TX power control (MTPC) The ATPC is deactivated. The power of the far-end transmitter can be adjusted manually in the "Manual Tx level" box. Setting in normal operation: inactive Overdrive mode permitted Tx power control depends on the BER of the receive signal. At a BER of approx. 1E-6, the reachable maximum Tx power is increased by 1.5 dB in the overdrive mode (this must also be enabled in the far-end transmitter). In this mode, the backoff factor required to achieve the specified residual bit error ratio (RBER) is reduced. The resulting degradation, however, is neglible compared with the BER of 1E-6 occurring on the radio hop. This permits the radio hop link to be maintained even in case of deep fading events. Activation starts at PRx < -68 dBm for 64 MLQAM and at PRx < -66 dBm for 128 MLQAM. The overdrive mode is only active, if the ATPC function has been enabled.

RF/160 OI

4-9

Configuration

Operating Instructions

Key word 4-9:

Adjusting the Rx ATPC reference level

Control level The nominal receive level can be adjusted to the following values: -30 dBm -40 dBm -45 dBm -50 dBm Actual state This option displays the status of ATPC control and that of the control channel in the return direction. ATPC deactivated via configuration The ATPC is deactivated for operation with constant Tx power. Control loop switched off, error timer expired The ATPC controlled transmission channel is interrupted and the error timer has expired. The far-end Tx output power is set to a user defined value until the transmission channel has been re-established. Control loop active, Rx level control The far-end Tx power is controlled by the receive level. Control loop active, BER control The far-end Tx power is controlled by the receive level and BER. Control loop active, error timer running The ATPC-controlled transmission channel is interrupted and the error timer is running. The far-end Tx power is still controlled by the receive level. Error handling
Key word 4-10: Adjusting the Rx ATPC holding time

Error timer The following values can be adjusted as holding time for Tx power control in case of interruptions of the radio hop. 8 s ...68 min Recommended setting: 4 min. (default setting)

The holding time adjusted should not be too short, in order to avoid that the system becomes unstable in case of difficult propagation conditions.
Tx level after error timer has expired / Manual Tx level - The following values can be adjusted: Minimum value Nominal value - 14.5 dB Nominal value - 9.5 dB Nominal value - 4.5 dB Nominal value Setting in normal operation: Nominal value

The maximum ATPC range is 20 dB (3 to 8 GHz, 64MLQAM) / 19.5 dB (3 to 8 GHz, 128MLQAM) / 16 dB (13 GHz). The minimum Tx power of +10.5 dBm (3-8 GHz) / +12 dBm (13 GHz) cannot be undershot.

4-10

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions
Key word 4-11:

Configuration
RF band position - Rx

Frequency band selection Band position The RF modules can be used for LB and UB operation. Lower sideband The channel frequencies lie below the oscillator frequency (-140 MHz). Upper sideband The channel frequencies lie above the oscillator frequency (+140 MHz). Subband The selected RF bands are divided up into four subbands each. The channel frequency depends on the selected subband and the band position in the RF mixer. Also see chapter 12 Frequency Setting . Lower subband 1 Lower subband 2 Lower subband 3 Lower subband 4 Upper subband 1 Upper subband 2 Upper subband 3 Upper subband 4

RF/160 OI

4-11

Configuration

Operating Instructions

4.5

Rx oscillator
Key word 4-12: Requesting the Rx oscillator frequency

By selecting the module in the HW view, RF unit Rx oscillator Management Configuration the following Rx oscillator configuration window appears:

This mask shows the nominal oscillator frequency.

4-12

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions

Configuration

4.6

Diversity receiver (RxD)

RF unit Div. receiver Management Configuration

The parameters can then be modified by means of the following steps: Process Modify

RF/160 OI

4-13

Configuration

Operating Instructions

IF amplifier Operating mode Normal Due to the small control time constant, the amplifier can react to rapid level fluctuations. Setting in normal operation: Normal Sweep The control time constant of the IF amplifier is high. Thus, rapid level fluctuations during sweep measurements are not compensated in order not to falsify the test results.

Key word 4-13:

Adjusting the RxD modulation

Combiner Modulation scheme (read-only access) The distortion-controlled IF combiner evaluates the distortions occurring in the IF spectrum. The following modulation modes can be adjusted: 64 QAM 128 QAM IF output level (read-only access) Two modes are possible: controlled uncontrolled Length compensation Path Main The waveguide of the main path (main antenna) is shorter than the one of the diversity path. The length compensation cable is inserted in signal path X2 X23. Diversity The waveguide of the diversity path (diversity antenna) is shorter than the one of the main path. The length compensation cable is inserted in signal path X22 X23. Delay compensation This setting permits electronic fine tuning within a range of approx. 2.5 ns. 0...255 Corresponds to an approximate delay change of 2.5 ... 0 ns referred to the combiner input X23.

Normal operation Only for length compensation

4-14

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions

Configuration

Operating mode Power and distortion control (normal) The combiner evaluates the spectrum and adds up the two receive signals. Before being added, the lower signal is suppressed by 2 dB per 1 dB difference. Max. ratio The combiner adds up the two signals, the stronger signal (max. C/N) being preferred. Signal distortions caused by selective fading are not taken into account. Before being added, the lower signal is suppressed by 2 dB per 1 dB difference. Normal operation: Power and distortion control (normal) Test mode Normal operation Both IF input signals are added up. Input X24 permanently through-connected Only the signal available at input X24 is passed through to the output. Input X23 permanently through-connected Only the signal available at input X23 is passed through to the output. Setting in normal operation: Normal

Length compensation Compensation ON The mode required for executing and testing the length compensation function is activated. The signals available at the combiner inputs are shifted with respect to each other using a programmable phase shifter. Delay time differences between the main and diversity signal paths caused by different waveguide lengths lead to notches moving through the output spectrum. Using an IF spectrum analyzer connected to the combiner output, the delay time difference between the main and diversity signal paths can be determined and the length compensation can be performed and tested. Auto-run The phase shifter is periodically triggered with the adjustable frequency. A notch occurring is moving through the spectrum.

This option does not have to be acknowledged after selection!


Single step The phase of the phase shifter is shifted by approx. 3 degrees per step. The notch moves through the IF spectrum in single steps.

This option does not have to be acknowledged after selection!


Frequency Selectable frequency which is used to trigger the phase shifter in the auto-run mode. 0.5...5 Hz

RF/160 OI

4-15

Configuration

Operating Instructions

4.6.1 Delay time compensation in space diversity configurations


Key word 4-14: Delay time compensation in space diversity configurations

The delay time compensation in space diversity configurations is described in section 4.10.2 of the Commissioning Instructions RF/160-CI included in this Operator Manual.

4-16

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions

Configuration

4.7

Modem Unit (MU)

Modem OPx/PRx

This command opens the MU configuration window:

RF/160 OI

4-17

Configuration

Operating Instructions

4.7.1 SPI STM-1 - Electrical


Electrical STM-1 interface No configuration necessary.

4-18

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions

Configuration

4.7.2 SPI STM-1 - Optical


Optical STM-1 interface

OPT Management Configuration

Control mode ALC Automatic Laser Control. The power of the laser diode is controlled automatically. Operating mode

Only active if the module does not receive a valid input signal ("LOS" module alarm).
ALC restart Test The laser power is switched on for 2 seconds. Manual The laser power is switched on for 90 seconds.

RF/160 OI

4-19

Configuration

Operating Instructions

4.7.3 RPSI STM-1


No configuration necessary.

4-20

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions

Configuration

4.7.4 Modem Unit Power Supply


No configuration necessary.

RF/160 OI

4-21

Configuration

Operating Instructions

4.7.5 Modulator

MD 155/140... Management Configuration


64MLQAM:

128MLQAM:

Key word 4-15:

Activating the MD XPIC

Operating mode XPIC For synchronization in XPIC operation. Data signal from Own DPU Normal setting. Opposite DPU Setting for the right MD for 1+1 HSB and 1+1 Line Diversity with only one DPU STM-1 (A002).

Key word 4-16:

Unmodulated IF carrier

Carrier

(only for 64 MLQAM)

Test signal The MD supplies the transmitter with an unmodulated IF signal (140 MHz). The latter can be used for intermodulation and XPD measurements.

4-22

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions Modulated The IF output signal is 64 MLQAM modulated. Setting in normal operation: modulated. Mode

Configuration

(only for 128 MLQAM)

Normal The IF output signal is 128MLQAM modulated. Test signal Test signal with two sub-carriers 11 MHz from the IF center frequency (140 MHz) for antenna alignment.

RF/160 OI

4-23

Configuration

Operating Instructions

4.7.6 Demodulator

DM 155/140... Management Configuration


64MLQAM:

128MLQAM:

Key word 4-17:

Activating the DM XPIC

Mode XPIC For synchronization in XPIC operation.

Key word 4-18:

Adjusting the DM group delay equalizer

Group delay equalizer (only for 64 MLQAM)

The group delay equalizer in the demodulator compensates distortions caused by the connection of RF filters with a direct adjacent channel spacing. Direct adjacent channel filters are the channels routed at a spacing of +/- 40 MHz to the channel considered. An important parameter is the number of direct adjacent channel filters "passed" above and below the channel to be adjusted in the Tx and Rx branching network. The mutual influence between two direct adjacent channels in a diplexer is half as high as with the same channel combination with individual filters or combinations of individual filters and diplexers. Two direct adjacent channels arranged within a diplexer identify "one complete passage" only after the Tx-side and Rx-side diplexer have been passed. Diplexers are always arranged in identical pairs both on the Tx and Rx side.

4-24

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions Example for determining the adjacent channel filters passed

Configuration

Arrangement with a combination of individual filters and diplexer filters (Schematic arrangement for demonstration purposes only; selection of appropriate attenuation values in the factory => Reverse order of channel diplexers on the Tx and Rx side).

1a

TX

RX

4a

2a TX 4a TX 5a TX 3a TX

RX 5a RX 1a

RX 2a RX 3a

Channel 2a passes direct adjacent channel filter 1a (1x) (pair of diplexers!) (corresponds to line 6 of the table below). Channel 1a passes direct adjacent channel filter 2a (1x) (pair of diplexers!) (corresponds to line 4 of the table below). Channel 4a passes direct adjacent channel filter 5a (1x) (pair of diplexers!) (corresponds to line 4 of the table below). Channel 5a passes direct adjacent channel filter 4a (1x) (pair of diplexers!) (corresponds to line 6 of the table below). Channel 3a passes direct adjacent channel filters 4a (2x) and 2a (2x) (corresponds to line 3 of the table below).

Since the compensation takes place at IF level, a distinction of different cases is necessary depending on the position of the RF oscillator with respect to the RF channel (downstream combination in reverse or identical position).

RF/160 OI

4-25

Configuration

Operating Instructions

Number of direct adjacent channel filters f passed

Setting of group delay equalizer in the DM module depending on band position of channel to be adjusted fRF *) fRF-LO < fRF (overlaying) fRF-LO > fRF (underlaying)

No.

f > fRF

f < fRF

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

0 1 2 1 2 0 1 2 0

0 1 2 0 1 1 2 0 2 [4] [5] [5] [4] [3] [2] [2] [3] [1] [1]

fRF fRF-LO f *)

Frequency of the RF channel to be adjusted RF oscillator frequency of the RF channel (see read-only configuration value in the oscillator module) Frequency of direct adjacent channel(s) The band position corresponds to the band position configuration in the Tx or Rx module; also see Chapter 12 of the Operating Instructions: "Frequency Setting".

Possible settings in the "Delay equalizer" listbox of the demodulator 64 MLQAM module:

[1] [2] [3] [4] [5]

No adjacent channel filters; 1 adjacent channel filter above the center frequency; 1 adjacent channel filter below the center frequency; 2 adjacent channel filters above the center frequency; 2 adjacent channel filters below the center frequency.

4-26

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions

Configuration

4.7.7 Controller module

Controller Management Configuration

Backplane Version Displays the backplane version.

RF/160 OI

4-27

Configuration

Operating Instructions

4.7.8 DPU/RPS STM-1 Data Processing Unit


DPU/RPS STM-1 Management Configuration

General

Key word 4-19:

Defining the OP and PR channel no.

Direction Indicates the direction selected by means of the address connector in the MU. A radio terminal station always operates in the West mode. In a radio repeater station (two terminals connected back to back), one NE operates in the West mode and one in the East mode. East West

4-28

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions

Configuration

Slot position Indicates the card slot position of the DPU in the MU subrack. Left Right Channel Indicates the channel no. selected using the address connector. OP1...OP16 Operating channel 1 ... 16 PR1...PR2 Protection channel 1 ... 2 XPIC Enables the XPIC mode in the DPU. Each modification requires a reset. Redundancy Adjustment of the protection switching mode of the microwave radio system. Each modification requires a reset. None No protection switching option; N+0 configuration. Equipment protection Hot standby (HSB) protection with one DPU STM-1 A002. 1+1 line protection without occasional traffic (OT) 1+1 line protection with only one DPU STM-1 A002. Occasional traffic (OT) and XPIC operation are not possible. This operating mode is not available for all DPU software versions. n+m line protection N+M line protection mode. With DPU STM-1 A001 and RPSI / RPSC. Modulation mode The correct setting of the modulation mode is absolutely necessary for systems operating in the n+m line protection mode. 64 QAM Setting for equipment units equipped with a 64QAM demodulator (65.7205.155.00, Id. no. 061292). 128 QAM Setting for equipment units equipped with a 128QAM demodulator (65.7205.610.00, Id. no. 094840). Not defined Modulation mode not defined.

RF/160 OI

4-29

Configuration

Operating Instructions

Loopback

Key word 4-20:

BB/IF Loopback

Note: Always deactivate the automatic switchover function before you configure a loopback. Line side Radio direction The IF signal is switched back to the IF interface with RSOH processing. Line direction The BB signal is switched back to the BB interface without RSOH processing. Radio side Radio direction The IF signal is switched back to the IF interface without RSOH processing. Line direction The BB signal is switched back to the BB interface with RSOH processing. Loopback timeout The loopback is disconnected automatically after the adjusted period and the system returns again to normal operation. 5 min 15 min 1h 4h 24 h

4-30

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions Line protection OP:

Configuration

PR:

Enable QA0 criterion - Activation of the QA0 criterion for protection switching purposes. - The QA0 criterion is a threshold activated in case of an interruption of the data channel. After synchronization of the operating and protection channel on the Tx-side a switchover is carried out. - QA0 is generated by early warning pulses (Early Warning Pulse) of the DM FEC. Enable QA1 criterion - Activation of the QA1 criterion for protection switching purposes. - The QA1 criterion is a threshold activated in case of a strong degradation of the transmission quality of the channel. After synchronization of the operating and protection channel on the Tx-side a switchover is carried out. - QA1 is generated by early warning pulses (Early Warning Pulse) of the DM FEC.

RF/160 OI

4-31

Configuration

Operating Instructions

Enable QA2 criterion - Activation of the QA2 criterion for protection switching purposes. - The QA2 criterion is a threshold activated in case of a slight degradation of the transmission quality of the channel. After synchronization of the operating and protection channel on the Tx-side a switchover is carried out. - QA2 is generated by early warning pulses (Early Warning Pulse) of the DM FEC. Enable LWI criterion - Activation of the LWI criterion for protection switching purposes. - The LWI criterion is the sum of early warning pulses (correction pulses) of the DM FEC of each DM included in a transmission link covering several radio hops. After synchronization of the operating and protection channel on the Tx-side a switchover is carried out. Q0 threshold value Q1 threshold value Q2 threshold value - Adjustable Bit Error Ratio (BER) for the Qx thresholds, with Q0 > Q1 > Q2. Values between -12 -3 10 and 10 are adjustable. The respective threshold is taken into consideration only if the associated QA criterion has been enabled. Recommanded setting:
1

64 QAM -11 Q2=10 -8 Q1=10 -4 Q0=10 LWI criterion

128 QAM -12 Q2=10 -8 Q1=10 -4 Q0=10 1 LWI criterion

Alarm threshold value - Number of protection switchovers to enable the "number of protection switchovers exceeded threshold" alarm.
Key word 4-21: Switching thresholds

Operating channel Automatic - When this option has been selected, the channel will be protection-switched automatically in case of a fault or degradation of the transmission quality. The Setting box displays the channel automatically selected (OP, PR1 or PR2). If this option has not been selected (check mark), user-controlled switchover is possible via the Setting box. Frequency diversity (read-only access) - The signal of the operating channel is transmitted parallelly via a second RF channel (protection/standby channel). An internally controlled switch selects the better one of the two signals on the receive side. Frequency diversity is activated only in the 1+1 line protection without OT system configuration (with a DPU/RPS STM-1 A002 module)! Setting With the Automatic on option selected, the channel (OP, PR1 or PR2) currently used will be displayed: - OP No protection switching active. - PR1 The operating channel has been protection-switched and is being protected by standby channel PR1. - PR2 The operating channel has been protection-switched and is being protected by standby channel PR2.
1

In case of 128 QAM systems with OT option, it is recommended not to enable the LWI criterion in order to avoid unnecessary interruptions of the channel used for transmitting occasional traffic. This applies to DPU software versions up to V106/221100.

4-32

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions

Configuration

With the Automatic off option selected, a user-controlled switchover is possible. In this case, the system behaviour depends on the Precedence option. The Precedence option inactive leads to a manual switchover request: - OP An existing protection switching function shall be deactived, if possible. - PR1 The operating channel shall be protected by standby channel PR1, if possible. - PR2 The operating channel shall be protected by standby channel PR2, if possible. - PR1 or PR2 The operating channel shall be protected by standby channel PR1 or PR2, if possible. The appropriate selection is made by the system on an internal basis. No display. The Precedence option active leads to a forced switchover request: - OP An existing protection switching function is deactivated. The operating channel is never protection-switched. - PR1 The operating channel is continuously protected by standby channel PR1, provided that the latter is not used for occasional traffic (OT) on a permanent basis. - PR2 The operating channel is continuously protected by standby channel PR2, provided that the latter is not used for occasional traffic (OT) on a permanent basis. - PR1 or PR2 The operating channel is continuously protected by standby channel PR1 or PR2. The appropriate selection is made by the system. Only command, no display.
Precedence

In case of an automatic switchover (Automatic active), the following applies: - This option increases the priority of the operating channel for protection switching (see Priority box). Priority low = 15, Priority high = 0. - The activation of the Precedence option causes the value in the Priority box to be reduced by 8 ( higher channel priority) provided that the value displayed was higher than 7. - The deactivation of the Precedence option causes the value in the Priority box to be increased by 8 ( lower channel priority) provided that the value displayed was lower than 8. In case of a user-controlled switchover (Automatic not active), the following applies: - If the Precedence option is active, a switchover command is always executed, independent of the status of the selected channel ( forced switchover). - If the Precedence option is not active, the system permits a switchover only if the selected channel is not faulty. After switchover, the system will return to the operating channel automatically as soon as a fault is detected in the channel selected by the user ( manual switchover request).
Priority

- Adjustable channel priority. High = 0. Low = 15.


0...15

RF/160 OI

4-33

Configuration

Operating Instructions

Protection channel Occasional traffic - The system can transmit low-priority traffic via an additional SPI module in the protection channel. In case of failures, the OP channel is protected by the PR channel and occasional traffic is interrupted. none - No occasional traffic. - If none of the OP channels is faulty in the 'n+m line protection mode' of an 1+1 configuration, the data of operating channel OP1 are parallelly transmitted in PR1 (active frequency diversity). loose - The transmission of low-priority data is interrupted as soon as an OP channel is detected to be faulty. fixed - Permanent transmission of low-priority data signals. Protection switchover is not possible.

4-34

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions

Configuration

Equipment protection

Key word 4-22:

HSB equipment protection

Receiver Mode Automatic - Protection switchover takes place automatically as soon as an error is detected on the receive side. Locked - No automatic protection switching. The setting is frozen. Manual switchover - The receive side can be switched over using the corresponding setting. Setting - In the 'Automatic' or 'Locked' mode: Display of the active Rx path (OP or PR). - In the 'Manual switchover' mode: Display and setting of the active Rx path. PR - Used to display and select the PR protection channel. OP - Used to display and select the OP operating channel.

RF/160 OI

4-35

Configuration

Operating Instructions

Priority control Definition of priority control in the "Locked" and "Manual switchover" modes. Arbitrary setting in the "Automatic" mode. equal Manual switchover and automatic switchover are equal in priority. The last switching state will be maintained. automatic Automatic switchover has priority. Switchover takes place even in the "Locked" mode or in case of a fault. manual Manual switchover has priority. Manual switchover to a faulty channel is possible. RF switch equipped An RF switch is available for the Rx side. Otherwise a 10 dB coupler is used. Diversity switch equipped An RF switch is available for the Rx side with space diversity operation. Otherwise a 10 dB coupler is used. Baseband diversity Baseband diversity has been selected for the receive side.

4-36

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions

Configuration

Transmitter Mode Automatic Protection switchover will be executed automatically as soon as an error is detected on the transmit side. Locked No automatic protection switching. The setting is frozen. Manual switchover The transmit side can be switched over in the "Setting" box. Setting In the "Automatic" or "Locked" mode: Display of the active Tx path (OP or PR) In the "Manual switchover" mode: Display and setting of the active Tx path (OP or PR) PR Used to display and select the PR protection channel. OP Used to display and select the OP operating channel. Priority control Definition of priority control in the "Locked" and "Manual switchover" modes. Arbitrary setting in the "Automatic" mode. equal Manual and automatic switching are equal in priority. The last switching state will be maintained. automatic Automatic switching has priority. Switchover takes place even in the "Locked" mode and in case of a fault. manual Manual switching has priority. Manual switchover to a faulty channel is possible. RF switch equipped An RF switch is used for the Tx side. Switch type PIN A PIN diode switch is used. Relais An RF relay is used. Far-end station active Permits a forced switchover on the Tx side if the OP and PR Rx paths in the far end are disturbed simultaneously.

RF/160 OI

4-37

Configuration

Operating Instructions

Radio hop

Key word 4-23:

Radio hop identifier

Transmitter Radio hop identifier Configurable radio hop identifier inserted in the transmit direction. 0....15 Receiver Radio hop identifier Radio hop identifier expected from the receive direction. If the radio hop identifier received differs from the one expected, AIS will be inserted. 0....15

4-38

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions

Configuration

SOH processing

Key word 4-24:

SOH processing

General Line to radio Invert B1 The B1 byte will be inverted for tests in the radio direction. This setting is not relevant if automatic protection switching has been activated in the far-end DPU and/or a manual switchover has taken place. Insert AIS in case of J0-TIM If the expected and received path trace identifier signals differ from each other (Trace Identifier Mismatch), AIS will be inserted. Insert AIS in case of SES (B1) If the SES threshold (ITU-T G.826 ~ BER = 2E-5) is exceeded, AIS will be inserted. Radio to line Invert B1 For testing purposes, the B1 byte is inverted in the line direction. Insert AIS in case of J0-TIM If the expected and received path trace identifier signals differ from each other (Trace Identifier Mismatch), AIS will be inserted. Insert AIS in case of SES (B1) If the SES threshold (ITU-T G.826 ~ BER = 2E-5) is exceeded, AIS will be inserted.

RF/160 OI

4-39

Configuration

Operating Instructions

J0/C1 Line to radio Processing none The J0/C1 byte is not evaluated. No processing. Process J0 The J0 Path Trace Identifier of the signal from the line direction is monitored and compared with the expected string. In the radio direction, the J0 Path Trace string to be sent is inserted. The J0 Path Trace strings can be adjusted under the "User data" menu item of the DPU module. Process C1 The C1 byte of the signal from the line direction is monitored and compared with the byte expected. In the radio direction, the C1 byte to be sent is inserted. C1 value transmitted Defines the C1 byte transmitted in the radio direction. 0...255 C1 value received (read only) Displays the C1 byte received from the line side. 0...255 Radio to line Processing none The J0/C1 byte is not evaluated. No processing. Process J0 The J0 Path Trace Identifier of the signal from the radio direction is monitored and compared with the expected string. In the line direction, the J0 Path Trace string to be sent is inserted. The J0 Path Trace strings can be adjusted under the "User data" menu item of the DPU module. Process C1 The C1 byte of the signal from the radio direction is monitored and compared with the expected byte. In the line direction, the C1 byte to be sent is inserted. C1 value transmitted Defines the C1 byte transmitted in the radio direction. 0...255 C1 value received (read only) Displays the C1 byte received from the line side. 0...255

4-40

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions

Configuration

Service channels

Key word 4-25:

Activating the service channel

The SOH Access Module processes the two bytes E1 and F1 in addition to 4x64k in the RSOH. If additional bytes shall be used (e.g. E2), the SOH extension module is necessary.
Normal operation: The service channels are not selected. Enable (line to radio) The bytes to be processed can be selected. Otherwise the bytes will be through-connected. E1 The E1 byte (64 kbit/s) in the RSOH can be used. Default setting: E1 transmits EOW#1. F1 The F1 byte (64 kbit/s) in the RSOH can be used. Normal operation: F1 transmits EOW#2. E2 The E2 byte (64kbit/s) in the MSOH can be accessed via the SOH extension module. DSC The four digital service channels (4x64 kbit/s) in the RSOH can be used. Normal operation: The first DSC is used for QTN data transmission.

RF/160 OI

4-41

Configuration WSC The wayside channel (2048 kbit/s) in the SOH can be used.

Operating Instructions

DCCR The Data Communication Channel (Bytes D1 to D3) in the RSOH can be used with the SOH Extension module. DCCM The Data Communication Channel (Bytes D4 to D12) in the MSOH can be used with the SOH Extension module.

Enable (radio to line) The bytes to be processed can be selected. All other bytes are through-connected. E1 The E1 byte (64 kbit/s) in the RSOH can be used. Normal operation: E1 transmits EOW#1. F1 The F1 byte (64 kbit/s) in the RSOH can be used. Normal operation: F1 transmits EOW#2. E2 The E2 byte (64kbit/s) in the MSOH can be used with the SOH Extension module. DSC The four digital service channels (4x64 kbit/s) in the RSOH can be used. Normal operation: The first DSC is used for QTN data transmission. WSC The wayside channel (2048 kbit/s) in the SOH can be used. DCCR The Data Communication Channel (Bytes D1 to D3) in the RSOH can be used with the SOH Extension module. DCCM The Data Communication Channel (Bytes D4 to D12) in the MSOH can be used with the SOH Extension module.

The PR protection channel for the STM-1 signal does not automatically represent the protection channel for service channels. In n+m (n>1) configurations, the service channels (1+1 protected) are transmitted in OP1 and OP2.

4-42

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions

Configuration

DPU Management User Data


N+0:

N+M / HSB:

In this mask, the strings for the J0 Path Trace Identifier (15 bytes + 1 byte CRC) expected and to be sent can be modified. However, these are only effective if J0 processing has been enabled (see Configuration of DPU SOH processing). Received strings are displayed.

RF/160 OI

4-43

Configuration

Operating Instructions

4.7.9 DPU/RPS STM-1 manual protection switching 4.7.9.1 Line protection (n+1/2)
Using the MAN switch on the front panel of the DPU/RPS, manual switchover is possible.
Key word 4-26: Manual protection switching

DPU RPS
H11 Fault TX side H1 Fault Channel OP H3 Fault Channel PR1 H5 Fault Channel PR2 H7 Synchron Status H9 Indication TX or RX side S1 Switch

TX

RX OP PR1 PR2

H12 Fault RX side H2 Channel OP H4 Channel PR1 H6 Channel PR2 H8 Switching Indication

SYN TX

SWITCH LOCK

H10 Channel Locking

MAN

Fig. 4-1:

DPU/RPS STM-1 front panel

4-44

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions LED displays Tx alarm Indicates a general alarm on the Tx side of the DPU/RPS (e.g. no BB input at SPI). Rx alarm Indicates an alarm on the Rx side of the DPU/RPS (e.g. no RF input signal.)

Configuration

OP alarm This LED lights up if the Q0 threshold is exceeded and flashes (see remark) if Q2 or Q1 is exceeded (Rx side). QA2 (1E-8...1E-12), QA1 (1E-8...1E-4), QA0 (>1E-4) PR1 alarm This LED lights up if the QA0 threshold is exceeded and flashes (see remark) if QA2 or QA1 is exceeded (Rx side). QA2 (1E-8...1E-12), QA1 (1E-8...1E-4), QA0 (>1E-4) PR2 alarm This LED lights up if the QA0 threshold is exceeded and flashes (see remark) if QA2 or QA1 is exceeded (Rx side). QA2 (1E-8...1E-12), QA1 (1E-8...1E-4), QA0 (>1E-4)

NOTE: Fast flashing (50%) Slow flashing (10%) Very short pulse

QA1 has been exceeded. QA2 has been exceeded. Protection channel information is not available (only with line protection).

OP Displays data traffic in the OP channel (Tx or Rx side). PR1 Displays data traffic in the PR1 channel (Tx or Rx side). PR2 Displays data traffic in the PR2 channel (Tx or Rx side). SYN Displays the optimum bit synchronization between OP and PR1/PR2 for bit-error-free switchover. If this LED is OFF, one data channel is faulty. Switch Displays the start of a manual switchover. Lock Displays a channel lock (OP, PR) at the associated DPU/RPS. Automatic protection switching in case of a failure is no longer possible. Tx Displays the side currently in operation. LED is ON: Displays the operational status of the Tx side of the OP or PR. LED is OFF: Displays the operational status of the Rx side of the OP or PR.

The STM-1 traffic can be transmitted, for example, on the Tx side via the OP channel and on the Rx side via the PR channel, or vice versa.

RF/160 OI

4-45

Configuration Using the MAN switch

Operating Instructions

By pressing the MAN switch for a short time, the action (yellow Tx, LOCK or SWITCH LED) is switched on or off. By pressing it longer, it switches between the actions (Tx, LOCK or SWITCH).

OPPR switchover

Press the MAN switch twice for a longer period to switch over between the LOCK and SWITCH LEDs. When the SWITCH LED starts to flash, the manual switching process to one of the PRs can be executed.
PROP switchover

After a manual switchover, press the MAN switch once for a longer period until the LOCK LED starts to flash, i.e. the system switches back to the OP and is locked. The system selects the PR1 or PR2 protection channel by itself.

Switchover to a selected PR

If a selected PR shall be used for data transmission, the other PR has to be locked in the associated DPU/RPS (PR1 or PR2).

TX

RX OP PR1 PR2

SYN TX

SWITCH LOCK

PR1

Fig. 4-2:

Locking of PR1

4-46

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions

Configuration

After locking the selected PR at the associated DPU/RPS, switchover is necessary from the OP channel to the PR channel. Press the MAN switch twice for a longer period to change between the LOCK and SWITCH LEDs. When the SWITCH LED starts to flash, manual switchover to the unlocked PR is executed.

TX

RX OP PR1 PR2

SYN TX

SWITCH LOCK

OP1

Fig. 4-3:

Switching from OP1 to PR2

In case of systems with a n+1/2 configuration, manual switchover can be performed only on the Rx side. Rx switchover is executed from the far-end Tx side. In 1+1 HSB configurations, independent switchover of the Tx and Rx side is possible.

RF/160 OI

4-47

Configuration

Operating Instructions

4.7.9.2 Equipment protection (1+1 HSB)


Switching Tx1 (OP) to the antenna

When the LOCK LED is lit, press the MAN switch once for a longer period to disable the LOCK mode. Press the MAN switch twice for a longer period to change between the LOCK and SWITCH LEDs. When the SWITCH LED starts to flash, manual TX switchover to the OP is executed.

TX

RX OP PR1 PR2

SYN TX

SWITCH LOCK

Fig. 4-4:

Switching Tx1 to the antenna

4-48

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions

Configuration

Switching Tx2 (PR) to the antenna

When the LOCK LED is lit, press the MAN switch once for a longer period to disable the LOCK mode. Press the MAN switch twice for a longer period to change between the LOCK and SWITCH LEDs. When the SWITCH LED starts to flash, manual TX switchover to the OP is executed.

TX

RX OP PR1 PR2

SYN TX

SWITCH LOCK

Fig. 4-5:

Switching Tx2 to the antenna

RF/160 OI

4-49

Configuration

Operating Instructions

4.8

RPSC + RPSH modules

4.8.1 RPSC module

RPS-C Management Configuration

The RPSC is required in n+1/+2 configurations.


State Displays the CAN bus operating mode of an RPSC. Transit CAN bus in a cascade (8+1...14+2). End CAN bus termination for this RPSC.

4-50

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions

Configuration

4.8.2 RPSH module

RPS-H Management Configuration

The RPSH is required in 1+1 HSB configurations.


Relay position

Indicates the active Tx/Rx path in a HSB configuration.


Tx1 Tx1 is active (OP). Tx2 Tx2 is active (PR). Rx1 Rx1 is active (OP) if an RF switch is available. Rx2 Rx2 is active (PR) if an RF switch is available.

RF/160 OI

4-51

4.9

Configuration

4.9.1 Overview

4-52
SOHA Module ECC Gateway Module, alternatively to QD2 Module A Prozessor Q Interface RS485 LAN- Interface 10BaseT F- Interface RS232 F1 E1 DSC1 DSC2 DSC2 DSC3 DSC4 WSC2/1 WSC2/2 East
75 W 120 W 75 W 120 W

DSC 2x64 kbit/s 1+1 E1 DSC1 B MUX

OHAIC

OHAIC F1

DSC 2x64 kbit/s 1+1

Assignment acc. to QD2 Module

DSC 4x64 kbit/s 1+1 DSC3 DSC4


75 W 120 W

DSC 4x64 kbit/s 1+1 ECC/ 64kbit/s

WSC 1x2048 kbit/s 1+1


75 W 120 W

WSC2/1 WSC2/2

West

WSC 1x2048 kbit/s 1+1

HDLCController

Q Interface RS485

OHAIC QD2 Module

SOH Ext. Module

DCC R/ DCC M

Overhead Access Unit (OHAU)

EAST

A Bus Converter

SISA K

DCC R/ DCC M B

Q Interface RS485 Q Interface RS485 QSC 1x64 kbit/s 1+1

WEST

DCCR/D1

DSC 1x64 kbit/s 1+0

E2

WSC 1x2048 kbit/s 1+1

75 W 120 W

WSC2/1

RFCOH Module

RFCOH Module

WSC2/1 WSC2/2 DSC4

75 W 120 W 75 W 120 W

75 W 120 W

WSC2/2 EOW Module 1 EOW Array EOW Array EOW Module 2

WSC 1x2048 kbit/s 1+1

DSC4

Fig. 4-6: Service channels in the OHAU


DSC3 DSC2 DSC1 DSC8 PSTN 2w/6w Logic EOW branch PSTN 2w/6w EOW branch Logic East Remote Handset 0.3-3.4 kHz Analog Interf. 0.3-344 kHz Handset 0.3-3.4 kHz 64 kbit/s 1+1 North 64 kbit/s 1+1 East Remote Handset 0.3-3.4 kHz Handset 0.3-3.4 kHz Analog Interf. 0.3-344 kHz 64 kbit/s 1+1 North 64 kbit/s 1+1 East DSC7 DSC6 DSC5

DSC 4x64 kbit/s 1+1

DSC3

DSC2

DSC 4x64 kbit/s 1+1

DSC1

DSC8

DSC 4x64 kbit/s 1+1

DSC7

DSC6

DSC 4x64 kbit/s 1+1

Operating Instructions

DSC5

West

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions

Configuration

4.9.2 Service channels and connection options


The following table gives an overview of the service channels and connection options available in the system. Internal ports are wired directly via the backplane of the OHA Unit.
Operating mode RX1+0 TX1+0 Module Service channel Transmission capacity Ports 1+0 1+1

SOH Access

E1 F1 DSC1 DSC2-4 WSC

64 kbit/s 64 kbit/s 64 kbit/s 64 kbit/s 1x2 Mbit/s 2x2 Mbit/s 1x64 kbit/s 2x64 kbit/s 192 kbit/s 576 kbit/s 64 kbit/s

synchronous synchron

external G.703 EOW#1 internal a a a a external G.703 EOW#2 internal a a a a

plesiochronous external G.703 QTN2 internal a a a a plesiochronous external G.703 a a a a plesiochronous external G.703 plesiochronous synchronous synchronous synchronous synchronous external V.11

a a a a - - - - a a a a a - - - - a

SOH Extension E2

DCCR DCCM
RFCOH Access DSC1

ECC Gateway a a a a internal ECC Gateway a a a a internal

plesiochronous external G.703 EOW#1 internal EOW#2 internal a a a a QTN2 internal plesiochronous external G.703 plesiochronous external G.703 plesiochronous external G.703 plesiochronous
a a a a a a a a

DSC2-4

64 kbit/s

DSC5-8 64 kbit/s (optional) WSC 1x2 Mbit/s 2x2 Mbit/s

a a a a - - - - a

Table 1 : Overview of service channels and ports

RF/160 OI

2+0

4-53

Configuration Protection types for service channels

Operating Instructions

Only in microwave radio 1+1 equipment protection and 1+1 line protection configurations without OT (with one DPU/RPS STM-1), service channels are also protected by the radio protection configuration. Depending on the type of protection switching configuration, service channels can be protected by configuring the associated modules as defined in Table 2 below. This service channel protection switching process is not hitless. Meaning of the different configuration options: 1+0: The service channel is not protected. 1+1: The service channel is protected. TX1+0: The service channel is not protected on the Tx side and protected on the Rx side. RX1+0: The service channel is not protected on the Rx side and protected on the Tx side. 2+0: SC-OP and SC-PR transmit two independent unprotected service channel signals. The protection channel (PR) for the STM-1 signal is not automatically used as protection channel for service channels. In n+m (n>1) configurations, the service channels are transmitted in OP1 (SC-OP) and OP2 (SC-PR).
Service channel operating modes Version of DPU Microwave Radio Mode 1+0 SOH Access Module RX1+0 TX1+0 1+1 2+0 1+0 RFCOH Access Module RX1+0 TX1+0 1+1 2+0 SOH Ext. Module 1+0 a a a a a a a 2+0

1+0 n+0, n > 1 1+1 line protection w/o A001 OT 1+1 line protection w OT n+m line protection 1+1 line protection w/o OT 1+1 equipment protection

a a a a a a a
2

a a

a a

a a

a a a a a a a

a a a a a a
3

a a a a a a
2

a a a a a a
2

a a a a a

A002

Table 2: Protection options for service channels

The microwave radio protection switching configuration protects the service channels in such a way that a 1+0 SOH configuration corresponds to a 1+1 configuration. 3 This RFCOH configuration is theoretically possible. However, it makes no sense since there is only one RF channel. 4-54 RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions

Configuration

OHAU

This command opens the OHAU configuration window.

Note:

With the exception of the "RFCOH Access (East)", all modules of the OHAU are accessed in the network element WEST. When operated as repeater station, the network element EAST has its own OHAU display via which the "RFCOH Access (East)" module and the "SISA-0/N" module assigned to the NE EAST can be accessed.

RF/160 OI

4-55

Configuration

Operating Instructions

4.9.3 OHAU power supply


No configuration possible.

4-56

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions

Configuration

4.9.4 RFCOH Access Module

RFCOH access Management Configuration

The PR protection channel for the STM-1 signal is not always the protection channel for the service channels. In n+m (n>1) configurations, the service channels (1+1 protected) are transmitted in OP1 and OP2.
General Mode 4x64 kbit/s Indicates the selected service channels. In addition to the 2048 kbit/s WSC, the RFCOH module also transmits four codirectional 64 kbit/s service channels in compliance with ITU-T G.703 (120 Ohm). 8x64 kbit/s Indicates the selected service channels. In addition to the 2048 kbit/s WSC, the RFCOH module also transmits eight codirectional 64 kbit/s service channels in compliance with ITU-T G.703 (120 Ohm). WSC interface Balanced Indicates the selected interface. The interface of the 2048 kbit/s service channel has an impedance of 120 Ohm at the Sub-D connector. Coaxial Indicates the selected interface. The interface of the 2048 kbit/s service channel has an impedance of 75 Ohm at connector 1.6/5.6.

RF/160 OI

4-57

Configuration

Operating Instructions

Key word 4-27:

Selecting RFCOH with 4x64 k

DSC 1....4 DSC1...DSC4 Activation of four digital 64 kbit/s service channels.


Key word 4-28: DSC1 assignment in the RFCOH: EOW, QTN or External

DSC1 interface The digital service channel in the RFCOH can be internally switched to other modules or interfaces. External An external 64 kbit/s signal can be applied to DSC1. QTN2 DSC1 is used to transmit the 64 kbit/s signal of the Q-module. EOW1 DSC1 is used to transmit the 64 kbit/s signal of EOW module #1. EOW2 DSC1 is used to transmit the 64 kbit/s signal of EOW module #2.

4-58

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions

Configuration

Key word 4-29:

Defining the RFCOH 4x64 k protection switching option

Channel redundancy switching Selectable protection switching options for DSC1...DSC4: 1+0 No protection of service channel signals. Rx 1+0 The Rx-side service channels are not protected in simplex operation (e.g. TV signal transmission). Tx 1+0 The Tx-side service channels are not protected in simplex operation (e.g. TV signal transmission). 1+1 The service channels are protected.

Key word 4-30:

Selecting the alarm display for RFCOH 4x64 k

Tx direction Send AIS in case of LOS The module transmits AIS as soon as LOS is detected. Send AIS if AIS is received The module transmits AIS if AIS is received. Send LA Tx in case of LOS The module transmits a LA Tx alarm as soon as the input signal fails. Rx direction Send AIS in case of LOS The module transmits AIS as soon as LOS is detected. Send AIS if AIS is received The module transmits AIS if AIS is received.

RF/160 OI

4-59

Configuration

Operating Instructions

Key word 4-31:

Selecting RFCOH with 8x64 k

DSC 5...8 DSC5...DSC8 Activation of the four additional digital 64 kbit/s service channels.
Key word 4-32: Defining protection switching options for RFCOH 8x64 k

Channel redundancy switching Selectable protection switching options for DSC5...DSC8. 1+0 No protection of the service channel signal. Rx 1+0 The Rx-side service channels are not protected in simplex operation (e.g. TV signal transmission). Tx 1+0 The Tx-side service channels are not protected in simplex operation (e.g. TV signal transmission). 1+1 The service channels are protected.

4-60

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions

Configuration

Key word 4-33:

Selecting the alarm display for RFCOH 8x64 k

Tx direction Send AIS in case of LOS The module transmits AIS as soon as LOS is detected. Send AIS if AIS is received The module transmits AIS if AIS is received. Send LA Tx in case of LOS The module transmits a LA Tx alarm as soon as the input signal fails. Rx direction Send AIS in case of LOS The module transmits AIS as soon as LOS is detected. Send AIS if AIS is received The module transmits AIS if AIS is received.

RF/160 OI

4-61

Configuration

Operating Instructions

Key word 4-34:

Activating the 2048 k WSC in the RFCOH

WSC None Selection of no 2048 kbit/s service channel. OP Transmission in the operating channel. 1+0 or 1+1. OP+PR Independent transmission in the operating and protection channel.
Key word 4-35: Defining the 2048 k WSC protection switching option in the RFCOH

Channel redundancy switching Selectable protection switching options for the 2048 kbit/s WSC. 1+0 No protection of the service channel signal. Rx 1+0 The Rx-side service channels are not protected in simplex operation (e.g. TV signal transmission). Tx 1+0 The Tx-side service channels are not protected in simplex operation (e.g. TV signal transmission). 1+1 The service channel is protected.

4-62

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions
Key word 4-36:

Configuration
Selecting the alarm display of the 2048 k WSC in the RFCOH

Tx direction Send AIS in case of LOS The module transmits AIS as soon as LOS is detected. Send AIS if AIS is received The module transmits AIS if AIS is received. Send LA Tx in case of LOS The module transmits a LA Tx alarm as soon as the input signal fails. Rx direction Send AIS in case of LOS The module transmits AIS as soon as LOS is detected. Send AIS if AIS is received The module transmits AIS if AIS is received.

RF/160 OI

4-63

Configuration

Operating Instructions

4.9.4.1 RFCOH wayside interface 75 Ohm


Key word 4-37: Setting RFCOH wayside interface 75 Ohm

Jumper positions on the RFCOH module for the 75 Ohm operating mode.

8 X100 X300

X100 X303

X100 X301

X100 X302

Fig. 4-7:

RFCOH wayside interface 75 Ohm

4-64

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions

Configuration

4.9.4.2 RFCOH wayside interface 120 Ohm


Key word 4-38: Setting RFCOH wayside interface 120 Ohm

Jumper positions on the RFCOH module for the 120 Ohm operating mode.

8 X100 X300

X100 X303

X100 X301

X100 X302

Fig. 4-8:

RFCOH wayside interface 120 Ohm

RF/160 OI

4-65

Configuration

Operating Instructions

4.9.5 EOW module


For detailed information on how to operate the service unit, please refer to the Operator Manual for the DE-2 Service Unit, Ident. no. AN00035433, and to the annex, chapter 16, of these Operating Instructions. EOW#1 Management Configuration

Key word 4-39:

Selecting 2/6-wire PSTN inteface of the EOW

Equipment PSTN2 Indicates whether the 2-wire PSTN port to the PABX is available/not available. PSTN6 Indicates whether the 6-wire PSTN port (E&M) to the PABX is available/not available. Branching Indicates whether the EOW branching module for a third direction is available/not available.

4-66

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions

Configuration

Key word 4-40:

Transmitting or blocking the EOW

General Analog interface Selection of the external analog interface. Connection to local phone Internal analog connection enabled.
Key word 4-41: Defining the clock source of the EOW

Clock synchronization West The signal coming from the West direction is used for synchronization purposes. East The signal coming from the East direction is used for synchronization purposes. Internal crystal The internal crystal is used for synchronization purposes. Connection Western SOH Access The EOW is connected to the SOH. RFCOH Access The EOW is connected to the RFCOH. None No transmission. Eastern SOH Access The EOW is connected to the SOH. RFCOH Access The EOW is connected to the RFCOH. External digital channel The EOW is connected to the interface for an external digital service channel. None No transmission. Northern active The North interface is active. inactive The North interface is inactive.

RF/160 OI

4-67

Configuration

Operating Instructions

Key word 4-42:

Defining the level of the PSTN port

PSTN2 Level Level settings for the interface to the PABX. Rx Tx -7...-13 dBm 0...-6 dBm

Amplification (busy tone identification) Selectable amplification to the PABX. 10 / 20 dB

Key word 4-43:

Selecting the clock source for EOW branching

Branching

The EOW branching module provides a branch in a third direction.


Clock synchronization Selectable clock sources for the analog port. Internal The own crystal is used for synchronization purposes. North The signal coming from North is used as synchronization clock source.

4-68

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions

Configuration

4.9.6 QTN module

QTN2 Management Configuration

Key word 4-44:

Configuring QD2/SISA-K

General NOTE: For detailed information on the individual operating modes, please refer to the "SISA-DCN", document no. 62.1013.600.05-A001, and to "SISA in microwave radio", Ident. no. AN 00042537. Operating mode Bus service, head station This mode is selected if QTN is part of a QD2 bus. Bus service relay/terminal station This mode is selected if QTN is part of a QD2 bus. Automatic ring, ring start This mode is selected if QTN is part of a QD2 ring which is controlled by a single SISA-K/R. Automatic ring, ring member This mode is selected if QTN is part of a QD2 ring which is controlled by a single SISA-K/R.

RF/160 OI

4-69

Configuration

Operating Instructions

SISA-K-controlled ring, master West This mode is selected if QTN is part of a QD2 ring which is controlled by a triple SISA-K/R ring router. SISA-K-controlled ring, master East This mode is selected if QTN is part of a QD2 ring which is controlled by a triple SISA-K/R ring router. SISA-K-controlled ring slave This mode is selected if QTN is part of a QD2 ring which is controlled by a triple SISAK/R ring router.

Within a configuration, all QTN modules must be set to an operating mode which can be selected from an appropriate group (bus, automatic ring, SISA-K controlled ring). In bus or automatic ring configurations, one QTN must be adjusted as head station or ring start. All other QTNs of the configuration must be adjusted as relay/terminal station or ring members. In SISA-K-controlled configurations, one Master West and one Master East is required at the site where SISA-K is used as ring router. The other QTNs must be adjusted as ring slaves. Depending on the QTN mode adjusted, the following settings should be performed: 1)
QTN mode Bus service, head station Automatic ring, ring start SISA-K-controlled ring, master West SISA-K-controlled ring, master East SISA-K/R setting A set to Microwave radio interface D set to Local interface

2)

QTN mode Bus service, relay/terminal station Automatic ring, ring member SISA-K-controlled ring, slave

SISA-K/R setting A set to Local interface D set to Microwave radio interface

Also see 4.6.8 SISA-K/R.

4-70

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions

Configuration

Interface configuration

Defines the routing of QTN logic interfaces East and West to the physical interfaces A and B. The physical interface A is the internal interface to an SOH channel in the RF link. The physical interface B may either be a 64 kbit/s interface to G.703 / V.11 on the connecting panel or an internal link to an SOH channel in the baseband. In the Bus service Relay/Terminal station, Automatic ring, Ring member or SISA-K controlled ring, Slave modes, set QTN to:
Standard (West << A , B >> East) Select this option if the physical interface A -points to any interface of the bus-controlled QTN (bus configuration); -points to the East interface of the ring-controlled QTN (automatic ring configuration); -points to the Master West (SISA-K-controlled ring). Reverse (West << B , A >> East) Select this option if the physical interface B -points to any interface of the bus-controlled QTN (bus configuration); -points to the East interface of the ring-controlled QTN (automatic ring configuration); -points to the Master West (SISA-K-controlled ring).

In the Bus service, head station mode, set QTN to:


Standard (West << A , B >> East) Select this option if both logic interfaces West and East are active (system supports two bus branches). Select this option if only the logic interface East is active and shall be routed via the physical interface B. Reverse (West << B , A >> East) Select this option if only the logic interface East is active and shall be routed via the physical interface A.

Parts of V.11 Select this option, if at least one section of the configuration uses V.11 interfaces of the QTN. All QTNs or equivalent components (SSTK-1 or SISA-K3/T modules) included in the configuration should be set to the same value (all ON or all OFF). Active interface Selection of the active interface. A B

RF/160 OI

4-71

Configuration

Operating Instructions

Key word 4-45:

Selecting the 64-k transmission channel for the Q-signal

Interface A Operating mode Defines the data channel to be used for Q transmission to the radio side. RFCOH (DSC1) The Q-channel (64 kbit/s) is transmitted in DSC1 of the RFCOH. SOH (DSC1) The Q-channel (64 kbit/s) is transmitted in DSC1 of the SOH. Normal operation: Transmission in DSC1. Interface B Operating mode Defines the data channel to be used for Q transmission to the line side. External contradirectional The Q-channel (64 kbit/s) is transmitted in an external contradirectional 64 kbit/s DSC. External codirectional The Q-channel (64 kbit/s) is transmitted in an external codirectional 64 kbit/s DSC. RFCOH (DSC1) The Q-channel (64 kbit/s) is transmitted in DSC1 of the RFCOH. SOH (DSC1) The Q-channel (64 kbit/s) is transmitted in DSC1 of the SOH. Normal operation: Transmission in DSC1.

4-72

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions

Configuration

4.9.7 ECC Gateway module


ECC Gateway Management Configuration ECC

Key word 4-46:

Configuring the ECC Gateway Module

General NOTE: For more detailed information on the different operating modes, please refer to the documents "SISADCN", Doc. no.: 62.1013.600.05-A001 and "SISA in microwave radio technology", Ident no. AN00042537. Indication LAN alarm ON

If this box is check-marked, a "No LAN connection" alarm is displayed.


West Indication ECC alarm ON

If this box is check-marked, the "ECC transmission disturbed" alarm is activated on the West or East side.

RF/160 OI

4-73

Configuration Operating mode

Operating Instructions

Defines the data channel to be used for transmitting the Q-channel.


DCC The Q-channel in transmitted in the DCC (DCCR or DCCM). Setting DCC

Utilization of transmission channels (display)


OP Operating channel OP PR Protection channel PR Selection DCC

Utilization of service channels (display)


DCCR Utilization of the DCC in the RSOH (D1-D3) for transmitting the QD2/Q3p protocol. DCCM Utilization of the DCC in the MSOH (D4-D12) for transmitting the QD2/Q3p protocol.

4-74

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions

Configuration

4.9.8 ECC Gateway module - addresses


ECC Gateway Management Configuration
Adresses Operating mode Q3p The local NE is connected to the SOA via the LAN interface. For this purpose, the OSI protocol stack is used (SISA-O). Remote NEs are connected to the local NE via the ECC and can therefore also be controlled by the SOA. QD2-IP The local NE is connected via the LAN interface to the SOA. For this purpose, the TCP/IP protocol stack is used (SISA-I). Remote NEs are connected to the local NE via the ECC and can therefore also be controlled by the SOA. QD2-SISA-V The NE includes a SISA-V used for communication with further NEs. These NEs are connected to SISA-V via the ECC. The NE itself acts as a QD2 Slave, i.e. it is connected to a RS485 bus. QD2-SISA-V-IP The NE includes a SISA-V used for communication with further NEs. These NEs are connected to SISA-V via the ECC. The NE itself is directly connected to the SOA via the LAN interface. For this purpose, the TCP/IP protocol stack is used (SISA-I). QD2-via-SISA-V The NE is connected via the ECC to a NE with SISA-V operated in the QD2-SISA-V mode. This operating mode is provided for cases where other SISA transport paths to a remote NE do not exist. Up to 29 NEs can be connected via SISA-V. The NEs are identified by their SISA node number. Using the SISA-V Gateway address, the NE is selected to which the remote NE shall set up a connection.

SOA SISA-O SOA SISA-O SOA SISA-I SOA SISA-I

LAN

Local NE Q3p Local NE Q3p Local NE QD2-IP

ECC

Remote NE Q3p Local NE QD2-SISA-V ECC Remote NE QD2-via-SISA-V

LAN

RS485

LAN

LAN

Local NE QD2-SISA-V-IP

ECC

Remote NE QD2-via-SISA-V

RF/160 OI

4-75

Configuration

Operating Instructions

4.9.8.1 Q3p operating mode

Internet addresses

An Internet address of a network management system is required for the Q3p interface. When using a second, i.e. redundant computer, the Internet address of the latter must also be communicated to the NE. The Internet address is 32 bits long and is composed of four 8-bit sections separated by dots. Each 8-bit section represents 256 numbers (0 to 255).
SOA Internet address of a network management computer. 0...255.0...255.0...255.0...255 red. SOA Internet address of a redundant network management computer. 0...255.0...255.0...255.0...255

4-76

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions TCP/IP connection to network element

Configuration

It is possible to log on to a network element via TCP. For this purpose the NE is assigned an Internet address composed of the IP address, the IP subnet mask as well as the IP address of a default router.
IP address Unambiguous IP address of the network element within a network (Internet/Intranet) 0...255.0...255.0...255.0...255 Subnet mask Mask for part of the IP address 0...255.0...255.0...255.0...255 Default Gateway IP address of the default router 0...255.0...255.0...255.0...255 TSAP IDs

The Transport Service Access Point Identification (TSAP ID) is part of the transport address for the OSI layer 4 (transport layer). The transport layer offers protected, transparent data transmission between terminals. It also offers endto-end error monitoring, sequentialization of data and flux control. The TSAP ID is 16 bits long and is composed of two 8-bit section separated by a dot. Each 8-bit section represents 256 numbers (0 to 255). On address assignment, please note that the same address must not be used several times.
QD2 Master (virt. SISA-V) SISA node no. SISA node no. of the NE for the QD2 Master. 0...254 NE connect. no. (SOA) Access no. of the NE for SOA (NE application) for the QD2 Master. 0...254 NE connect. no. (red. SOA) Access no. of the NE for the redundant SOA (NE application) for the QD2 Master. 0...254

RF/160 OI

4-77

Configuration

Operating Instructions

Layer-3 addresses The Layer-3 address (OSI-L3 address) is required for setting up a transmission link between the SOA and NE, for the remote logon from one NE to another and for OSI routing. The OSI-L3 address is also referred to as NSAP (Network Service Access Point). In most cases of application, the OSI-L3 address of the NE is generated automatically from the NE manufacturing no. (automatic mode). In this case, further settings in the "Layer-3 addresses" dialog are not necessary. If the NE shall be operated in third-party networks, it may be necessary to adjust an OSI-L3 address manually (manual mode). In order to avoid malfunctions, both the addressing scheme and the individual addresses must be provided and carefully administered by the network operator. OSI Layer-3 addresses should comply with the ISO 8348/Add.2 standard.
Mode automatic Automatic address assignment adjusted. manual Manual address assignment adjusted.

Routing level A Routing Domain is divided up into individual areas. An End System (ES) can only transmit or receive messages. The SOA can be an ES. The network elements are Intermediate Systems (IS) which are also appropriate to pass on messages (routing function). A Level-1 router can route only within its own area. If a Level-1 router receives a message determined for another area, this message is passed on to the nearest Level-2 router. If there is no Level-2 router in the own area, the message is discarded. A Level-2 router does not only know the IS and ES of its own area but als the Level-2 routers located in the other areas. If a message is determined for another area, it is passed on by the Level-2 router of the source area to the Level-2 router of the destination area (if necessary via several Level-2 routers). An area can also include several Level-2 routers. Level-2 routing between Level-2 routers is possible only if the corresponding Level-2 routers are directly interconnected (i.e. no via Level-1 routers).
IS type Level 1 Level-1 router Level 2 Level-2 router

4-78

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions

Configuration

Structure of the OSI Layer-3 address The OSI Layer-3 address is composed of three parts, i.e. the Area address, System ID and NSAP selector. The Area address is used to address the sub-network to which the NE belongs. In the example below, addresses of the "ANSI NSAP address format" are used (AFI 39, IDI=ISO DCC=840F [USA], DFI=80). Area address: 39000080000000000000000000 The second part of the address (System ID) represents an unambiguous System Identifier which is unique in the entire Routing Domain. Example: 96F100120000 In the hexadecimal format, this address corresponds to Internet address "150.248.0.18". The third part of the address is the NSAP selector. It selects the transport layer as Layer-3 user. It is always 01. On activation of the "manual" Layer-3 addressing mode, the automatic address assignment is excluded from the manufacturing number. In this case, a remote logon from the Operator Terminal is usually no longer possible (only local logon).
Length NSAP 4...20 Length Sys ID 1...8 NSAP NE NSAP of the network element in hexadecimal format NSAP NE (add.) NSAP of the additional network element in hexadecimal format NSAP SOA NSAP of the SOA in hexadecimal format NSAP SOA (red.) NSAP of the redundant SOA in hexadecimal format

RF/160 OI

4-79

Configuration

Operating Instructions

4.9.8.2 QD2-IP operating mode

Internet addresses For the TCP/IP interface, the Internet address of a network management computer is required. If a redundant computer is available, its address must also be known to the NE. The Internet address has a length of 32 bits and is composed of four 8-bit sections separated by dots. Each 8-bit section represents 256 numbers (0 to 255).
SOA

Internet address of a network mangement computer 0...255.0...255.0...255.0...255


Red. SOA Internet address of a redundant network management computer 0...255.0...255.0...255.0...255

4-80

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions

Configuration

TCP/IP connection to the network element


IP address Unambiguous IP address of the NE in a network (Internet/Intranet) 0...255.0...255.0...255.0...255 Subnet mask Mask for part of the IP address 0...255.0...255.0...255.0...255 Default Gateway IP address of the default router 0...255.0...255.0...255.0...255

TSAP IDs
QD2 Master (virt. SISA-V) SISA node no. SISA node no. of the NE for the QD2 Master 0...254 NE access no. (SOA) Access no. of the NE for SOA (NE application) for the QD2 Master 0...254 NE access no. (red. SOA) Access no. of the NE for the redundant SOA (NE application) for the QD2 Master 0...254 Layer-3 addresses Mode Automatic Automatic address assignment adjusted. Manual Manual address assignment adjusted. IS type Level 1 Level-1 router Level 2 Level-2 router Length NSAP 4...20 Length Sys ID 1...8 NSAP NE NSAP of the network element in hexadecimal format NSAP NE (add.) NSAP of the additional network element in hexadecimal format NSAP SOA NSAP of the SOA in hexadecimal format NSAP SOA (Red.) NSAP of the redundant SOA in hexadecimal format

RF/160 OI

4-81

Configuration

Operating Instructions

4.9.8.3 QD2-SISA-V operating mode

TCP/IP connection to network element IP address Unambiguous IP address of the NE within a network (Internet/Intranet) 0...255.0...255.0...255.0...255 Subnet mask Mask for part of the IP address 0...255.0...255.0...255.0...255 Default Gateway IP address of the default router 0...255.0...255.0...255.0...255

4-82

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions

Configuration

Operating mode The SISA node no. for VMP01 corresponds to the SISA node no. of the Master in the Q3p and QD2-via-SISA-V modes. However, it can also differ from it due to this setting possibility. SISA node no. for VMP01 1...30 Layer-3 addresses Mode Automatic Automatic address assignment adjusted. Manual Manual address assignment adjusted. IS type Level 1 Level-1 router Level 2 Level-2 router Length NSAP 4...20 Length Sys ID 1...8 NSAP NE NSAP of the network element in hexadecimal format NSAP NE (add.) NSAP of the additional network element in hexadecimal format NSAP SOA NSAP of the SOA in hexadecimal format NSAP SOA (Red.) NSAP of the redundant SOA in hexadecimal format

RF/160 OI

4-83

Configuration

Operating Instructions

4.9.8.4 QD2-SISA-V-IP operating mode

TCP/IP connection to the network element IP address Unambiguous IP address of the NE in a network (Internet/Intranet) 0...255.0...255.0...255.0...255 Subnet mask Mask for part of the IP address 0...255.0...255.0...255.0...255 Default Gateway IP address of the default router 0...255.0...255.0...255.0...255 Internet addresses

For the TCP/IP interface, the Internet address of a network management computer is required. If a redundant computer is available, its address must also be known to the NE. The Internet address has a length of 32 bits and is composed of four 8-bit sections separated by dots. Each 8-bit section represents 256 numbers (0 to 255).

4-84

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions SOA Internet address of a network mangement computer 0...255.0...255.0...255.0...255 Red. SOA Internet address of a redundant network management computer 0...255.0...255.0...255.0...255 TSAP IDs

Configuration

The Transport Service Access Point Identification (TSAP ID) is part of the transport address for the OSI layer 4 (transport layer). The transport layer offers protected, transparent data transmission between terminals. It also offers endto-end error monitoring, sequentialization of data and flux control. The TSAP ID is 16 bits long and is composed of two 8-bit section separated by a dot. Each 8-bit section represents 256 numbers (0 to 255). On address assignment, please note that the same address must not be used several times.
QD2 Master (virt. SISA-V) NE access no. (SOA) Access no. of the NE for SOA (NE application) for the QD2 Master 0...254 NE access no. (red. SOA) Access no. of the NE for the redundant SOA (NE application) for the QD2 Master 0...254 Operating mode The SISA node no. for VMP01 corresponds to the SISA node no. of the Master in the Q3p, QD2-IP, QD2-via-SISA-V and QD2-SISA-V-IP modes. However, it can also differ from it due to this setting possibility. SISA node no. for VMP01 1...30 Layer-3 addresses Mode Automatic Automatic address assignment adjusted. Manual Manual address assignment adjusted. IS type Level 1 Level-1 router Level 2 Level-2 router Length NSAP 4...20 Length Sys ID 1...8 NSAP NE NSAP of the network element in hexadecimal format NSAP NE (add.) NSAP of the additional network element in hexadecimal format NSAP SOA NSAP of the SOA in hexadecimal format NSAP SOA (Red.) NSAP of the redundant SOA in hexadecimal format

RF/160 OI

4-85

Configuration

Operating Instructions

4.9.8.5 QD2-via-SISA-V operating modes

TCP/IP connection to the network element IP address Unambiguous IP address of the NE in a network (Internet/Intranet) 0...255.0...255.0...255.0...255 Subnet mask Mask for part of the IP address 0...255.0...255.0...255.0...255 Default Gateway IP address of the default router 0...255.0...255.0...255.0...255

4-86

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions SISA-V Gateway address

Configuration

The SISA-V Gateway address is used to set up the control connection to remote NEs. The remote NE communicates with the Gateway NE via the ECC. The address used is the OSI address (see RID or nameplate of subrack).
SISA-V Gateway address SISA-V Gateway address in hexadecimal format. TSAP IDs QD2 Master (virt. SISA-V) SISA node no. SISA node no. of the NE for the QD2 Agent or SISA-V. 0...254 Layer-3 addresses Mode Automatic Automatic address assignment adjusted Manual Manual address assignment adjusted IS type Level 1 Level-1 router Level 2 Level-2 router Length of NSAP 4...20 Length of Sys ID 1...8 NSAP NE NSAP of the NE displayed in hexadecimal form NSAP NE (add.) NSAP of the additional NE displayed in hexadecimal form NSAP SOA NSAP of SOA displayed in hexadecimal form NSAP SOA (red.) NSAP of redundant SOA displayed in hexadecimal form

RF/160 OI

4-87

Configuration

Operating Instructions

4.9.9 ECC Gateway Module - IP Routing


ECC Gateway Administration Configuration IP routing
IP routing table

An IP router is used to interconnect several IP sub-networks. The transfer of an IP packet based on the IP destination address is referred to as IP routing. The router fulfills the task of passing on an incoming IP packet within a compound of several networks in an optimum way. For this purpose, it receives a table containing all data relevant for passing on IP packets received. This table is referred to as Routing Table.
Position Position of routing entry in the table. Up to ten entries are possible. If the table is empty, it contains no entries. Destination IP address of the route destination. The network destination can be a sub-network or a computer (host). If the destination is a subnetwork, this column displays the sub-network ID of the destination sub-network. If the network destination is a computer, this column displays the IP address of the destination computer. 0...255.0...255.0...255.0...255 Gateway IP address of the Gateway located on the way to the route destination. 0...255.0...255.0...255.0...255 Netmask Mask for part of the IP address of the route destination. The sub-netmask is used to determine the sub-network in which a host is located. 0...255.0...255.0...255.0...255 Active If this box is check-marked, the associated route is active (indicated in the routing table), otherwise it is inactive (contained in the MDB only). To add a route Click any line in the table to add a route. Then choose the 'Add' button. A window appears and requests you to enter the IP addresses of the route to be added. If the line is highlighted, the new route is added above the corresponding line, otherwise it will be added below it. To delete a route Select the route to be deleted by clicking it in the table. Then choose the 'Delete' button. The highlighted line disappears and all entries below it will move up by one position. To edit a route Select the route to be edited by clicking it in the table. Then choose the 'Edit' button. A window appears and requests you to enter the IP addresses of the route to be modified.

4-88

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions

Configuration

4.9.10 SOH Access Module

SOH access Management Configuration

General Check data continuously The data are continuously updated. SOH extension equipped Indicates whether the SOH extension module is available/not available. The SOH extension module provides access to additional bytes (E2, DCCR and DCCM) in the SOH.

RF/160 OI

4-89

Configuration

Operating Instructions

Key word 4-47:

Selecting the 2048 k WSC interface in the SOH

WSC West interface Balanced Indicates that the selected 2048 kbit/s service channel interface has an impedance of 120 Ohm at a Sub-D connector. Coaxial Indicates that the selected 2048 kbit/s service channel interface has an impedance of 75 Ohm at a 1.6/5.6 connector. WSC East interface Balanced Indicates that the selected 2048 kbit/s service channel interface has an impedance of 120 Ohm at the Sub-D connector. Coaxial Indicates that the selected 2048 kbit/s service channel interface has an impedance of 75 Ohm at the 1.6/5.6 connector. Backplane version Indicates the installed backplane version. A01...A16
Key word 4-48: DPU STM-1 address

DPU address Indicates the addresses of the DPUs whose radio channel is used to transmit the respective 2048 kbit/s service channel.

0 = no DPU connected 1...16=DPU OP1...OP16, 17=DPU PR1, 18=DPU PR2


OP East 1...18 PR East 1...18 OP West 1...18 PR West 1...18

4-90

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions

Configuration

Key word 4-49:

Selecting 4x64k service channels West in the SOH

DSC West DSC1...DSC4 Activation of 64 kbit/s service channels DSC1...DSC4. DSC1 interface external Access to an external 64 kbit/s service channel. QTN The QTN signal is transmitted in the DSC1.
Key word 4-50: Selecting RPS options for 4x64 k West in the SOH

Channel redundancy switching Selectable protection switching options: 1+0 No protection of the service channel signal. Rx 1+0 The Rx-side service channels are not protected in simplex operation (e.g. TV signal transmission). Tx 1+0 The Tx-side service channels are not protected in simplex operation (e.g. TV signal transmission). 1+1 The service channels are protected.

RF/160 OI

4-91

Configuration
Key word 4-51:

Operating Instructions
Selecting the alarm display for 4x64 k West in the SOH

Tx direction Send AIS in case of LOS The module transmits AIS as soon as LOS is detected. Send AIS if AIS is received The module transmits AIS if AIS is received. Send LA Tx in case of LOS The module transmits a LA Tx alarm as soon as the input signal fails. Rx direction Send AIS in case of LOS The module transmits AIS as soon as LOS is detected. Send AIS if AIS is received The module transmits AIS if AIS is received.

4-92

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions

Configuration

Key word 4-52:

Selecting 4x64k service channels East in the SOH

DSC East DSC1...DSC4 Activation of 64 kbit/s service channels DSC1...DSC4. DSC1 interface external Access to an external 64 kbit/s service channel. QTN2 The QTN signal is transmitted in DSC1. Channel redundancy switching Selectable protection switching options: 1+0 No protection of the service channel signal. Rx 1+0 The Rx-side service channels are not protected in simplex operation (e.g. TV signal transmission). Tx 1+0 The Tx-side service channels are not protected in simplex operation (e.g. TV signal transmission). 1+1 The service channels are protected.

RF/160 OI

4-93

Configuration
Key word 4-53:

Operating Instructions
Selecting the alarm display for 4x64 k East in the SOH

Tx direction Send AIS in case of LOS The module transmits AIS as soon as LOS is detected. Send AIS if AIS is received The module transmits AIS if AIS is received. Send LA Tx in case of LOS The module transmits a LA Tx alarm as soon as the input signal fails. Rx direction Send AIS in case of LOS The module transmits AIS as soon as LOS is detected. Send AIS if AIS is received The module transmits AIS if AIS is received.

4-94

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions

Configuration

Key word 4-54:

Selecting RPS options for 2048 k WSC West in the SOH

WSC West WSC None No WSC selected. OP Transmission in the operating channel. 1+0 or 1+1. OP+PR Independent transmission in operating and protection channel. Both channels are unprotected. Channel redundancy switching Selectable protection switching options: 1+0 No protection of the service channel signal. Rx 1+0 The Rx-side service channel is not protected in simplex operation (e.g. TV signal transmission). Tx 1+0 The Tx-side service channel is not protected in simplex operation (e.g. TV signal transmission). 1+1 The service channel is protected.

RF/160 OI

4-95

Configuration

Operating Instructions

Key word 4-55:

Selecting the alarm display for 2048 k WSC West in the SOH

Tx direction Send AIS in case of LOS The module transmits AIS as soon as LOS is detected. Send AIS if AIS is received The module transmits AIS if AIS is received. Send LA Tx in case of LOS The module transmits a LA Tx alarm as soon as the input signal fails. Rx direction Send AIS in case of LOS The module transmits AIS as soon as LOS is detected. Send AIS if AIS is received The module transmits AIS if AIS is received.

4-96

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions

Configuration

Key word 4-56:

Selecting RPS options for 2048 k WSC East in the SOH

WSC East WSC None No WSC selected. OP Transmission in the operating channel. 1+0 or 1+1. OP+PR Independent transmission in operating and protection channel. Both channels are unprotected. Channel redundancy switching Selectable protection switching options: 1+0 No protection of the service channel signal. Rx 1+0 The Rx-side service channel is not protected in simplex operation (e.g. TV signal transmission). Tx 1+0 The Tx-side service channel is not protected in simplex operation (e.g. TV signal transmission). 1+1 The service channel is protected.

RF/160 OI

4-97

Configuration

Operating Instructions

Key word 4-57:

Selecting the alarm display for 2048 k WSC East in the SOH

Tx direction Send AIS in case of LOS The module transmits AIS as soon as LOS is detected. Send AIS if AIS is received The module transmits AIS if AIS is received. Send LA Tx in case of LOS The module transmits a LA Tx alarm as soon as the input signal fails. Rx direction Send AIS in case of LOS The module transmits AIS as soon as LOS is detected. Send AIS if AIS is received The module transmits AIS if AIS is received.

4-98

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions

Configuration

Key word 4-58:

Occupying 64-k service channel E1 West in the SOH

E1 West E1 equipped The E1 byte is used. E1 interface EOW#1 The E1 byte is used for a EOW module #1. external The E1 byte is used for an external service channel.
Key word 4-59: Selecting RPS options for 64-k service channel E1 West in the SOH

Channel redundancy switching Selectable protection switching options: 1+0 No protection of the service channel signal. Rx 1+0 The service channels are not protected in simplex operation (e.g. TV signal transmission). Tx 1+0 The service channels are not protected in simplex operation (e.g. TV signal transmission). 1+1 The service channels are protected.

RF/160 OI

4-99

Configuration

Operating Instructions

Key word 4-60:

Selecting the alarm display for 64-k service channel E1 West in the SOH

Tx direction Send AIS in case of LOS The module transmits AIS as soon as LOS is detected. Send AIS if AIS is received The module transmits AIS if AIS is received. Rx direction Send AIS in case of LOS The module transmits AIS as soon as LOS is detected. Send AIS if AIS is received The module transmits AIS if AIS is received.

4-100

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions

Configuration

Key word 4-61:

Occupying 64-k service channel E1 East in the SOH

E1 East E1 equipped The E1 byte is used. E1 interface EOW#1 The E1 byte is used for EOW module #1. external The E1 byte is used for an external service channel.
Key word 4-62: Selecting RPS options for 64-k service channel E1 East in the SOH

Channel redundancy switching Selectable protection switching options: 1+0 No protection of the service channel signal. Rx 1+0 The Rx-side service channels are not protected in simplex operation (e.g. TV signal transmission). Tx 1+0 The Tx-side service channels are not protected in simplex operation (e.g. TV signal transmission). 1+1 The service channels are protected.

RF/160 OI

4-101

Configuration

Operating Instructions

Key word 4-63:

Selecting the alarm display for 64-k service channel E1 East in the SOH

Tx direction Send AIS in case of LOS The module transmits AIS as soon as LOS is detected. Send AIS if AIS is received The module transmits AIS if AIS is received. Rx direction Send AIS in case of LOS The module transmits AIS as soon as LOS is detected. Send AIS if AIS is received The module transmits AIS if AIS is received.

4-102

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions

Configuration

Key word 4-64:

Occupying 64-k service channel F1 West in the SOH

F1 West F1 equipped The F1 byte is used. E1 interface EOW#2 The F1 byte is used for EOW module #2. external The F1 byte is used for an external service channel.
Key word 4-65: Selecting RPS options for 64-k service channel F1 West in the SOH

Channel redundancy switching Selectable protection switching options: 1+0 No protection of the service channel signal. Rx 1+0 The Rx-side service channels are not protected in simplex operation (e.g. TV signal transmission). Tx 1+0 The Tx-side service channels are not protected in simplex operation (e.g. TV signal transmission). 1+1 The service channels are protected.

RF/160 OI

4-103

Configuration

Operating Instructions

Key word 4-66:

Selecting the alarm display for 64-k service channel F1 West in the SOH

Tx direction Send AIS in case of LOS The module transmits AIS as soon as LOS is detected. Send AIS if AIS is received The module transmits AIS if AIS is received. Rx direction Send AIS in case of LOS The module transmits AIS as soon as LOS is detected. Send AIS if AIS is received The module transmits AIS if AIS is received.

4-104

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions

Configuration

Key word 4-67:

Occupying 64-k service channel F1 East in the SOH

F1 East F1 equipped The F1 byte is used. E1 interface EOW#2 The F1 byte is used for EOW module #2. external The F1 byte is used for an external service channel.
Key word 4-68: Selecting RPS options for 64-k service channel F1 East in the SOH

Channel redundancy switching Selectable protection switching options: 1+0 No protection of the service channel signal. Rx 1+0 The Rx-side service channels are not protected in simplex operation (e.g. TV signal transmission). Tx 1+0 The Tx-side service channels are not protected in simplex operation (e.g. TV signal transmission). 1+1 The service channels are protected.

RF/160 OI

4-105

Configuration

Operating Instructions

Key word 4-69:

Selecting the alarm display for 64-k service channel F1 East in the SOH

Tx direction Send AIS in case of LOS The module transmits AIS as soon as LOS is detected. Send AIS if AIS is received The module transmits AIS if AIS is received. Rx direction Send AIS in case of LOS The module transmits AIS as soon as LOS is detected. Send AIS if AIS is received The module transmits AIS if AIS is received.

4-106

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions

Configuration

4.9.10.1

SOH wayside interface 75 Ohm


Key word 4-70: Setting SOH wayside interface 75 Ohm

Jumper positions on the SOH Access Module for adjusting the 75 Ohm operating mode.

8 X100 X100

1 X100 X401

X100 X101

X100 X403

X100 X102

X100 X404

X100 X104

X100 X405

Fig. 4-9:

SOH Access Module Interface 75 Ohm

RF/160 OI

4-107

Configuration

Operating Instructions

4.9.10.2

SOH wayside interface 120 Ohm


Key word 4-71: Setting SOH wayside interface 120 Ohm

Jumper positions on the SOH Access Module for adjusting the 120 Ohm operating mode.

8 X100 X100

1 X100 X401

X100 X101

X100 X403

X100 X102

X100 X404

X100 X104

X100 X405

Fig. 4-10:

SOH Access Module Interface 120 Ohm

4-108

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions

Configuration

4.9.11 SOH Extension Module

SOH extension Management Configuration

Key word 4-72:

Occupying 64-k service channel D1 West in the SOH

D1 West Channel Only internal service channels. DCCR Use of the DCC in the RSOH (D1 to D3) for transmitting the QD2/Q3p protocol. Only in conjunction with the ECC Gateway module in the OHAU. DCCM Use of the DCC in the MSOH (D4 to D12) for transmitting the QD2/Q3p protocol. Only in conjunction with the ECC Gateway module in the OHAU. None No service channel selected.

RF/160 OI

4-109

Configuration

Operating Instructions

Key word 4-73:

Selecting RPS options for DCC service channel West in the SOH

Channel redundancy switching Selectable protection switching options: 1+0 No protection of the service channel signal. Rx 1+0 The service channels on the Rx side are not protected in simplex operation (e.g. TV signal transmission). Tx 1+0 The service channels on the Tx side are not protected in simplex operation (e.g. TV signal transmission). 1+1 The service channels are protected.

Key word 4-74:

Selecting the alarm display for DCC service channel West in the SOH

4-110

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions

Configuration

Key word 4-75:

Occupying the DCC service channel East in the SOH

D1 East Channel Only internal service channels. DCCR Use of the DCC in the RSOH (D1 to D3) for transmitting the QD2/Q3p protocol. Only in conjunction with the ECC Gateway module in the OHAU. DCCM Use of the DCC in the MSOH (D4 to D12) for transmitting the QD2/Q3p protocol. Only in conjunction with the ECC Gateway module in the OHAU. None No service channel selected.

RF/160 OI

4-111

Configuration

Operating Instructions

Channel redundancy switching Selectable protection switching options: 1+0 No protection of the service channel signal. Rx 1+0 The Rx-side service channels are not protected in simplex operation (e.g. TV signal transmission). Tx 1+0 The Tx-side service channels are not protected in simplex operation (e.g. TV signal transmission). 1+1 The service channels are protected.

Key word 4-76:

Selecting RPS options for DCC service channel East in the SOH

4-112

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions

Configuration

Key word 4-77:

Occupying 64-k service channel E2 West in the SOH

E2 West
Key word 4-78: Selecting RPS options for 64-k service channel E2 West in the SOH

E2 The E2 service channel is available at the external interface (V.11). none No service channel E2 selected. PR Transmission in the protection channel. OP Transmission in the operating channel. OP+PR Transmission in the operating and protection channel.

Key word 4-79:

Selecting the alarm display for 64-k service channel E2 West in the SOH

Tx direction Send AIS in case of LOS The module transmits AIS as soon as LOS is detected. Send AIS if AIS is received The module transmits AIS if AIS is received. Rx direction Send AIS in case of LOS The module transmits AIS as soon as LOS is detected. Send AIS if AIS is received The module transmits AIS if AIS is received.

RF/160 OI

4-113

Configuration

Operating Instructions

Key word 4-80:

Occupying 64-k service channel E2 East in the SOH

E2 East

Key word 4-81:

Selecting RPS options for 64-k service channel E2 East in the SOH

E2 The E2 service channel is available at the external interface (V.11). none No service channel E2 selected. PR Transmissin in the protection channel. OP Transmission in the operating channel. OP+PR Transmission in the operating and protection channel.
Key word 4-82: Selecting the alarm display for 64-k serv. channel E2 West in the SOH

Tx direction Send AIS in case of LOS The module transmits AIS as soon as LOS is detected. Send AIS if AIS is received The module transmits AIS if AIS is received. Rx direction Send AIS in case of LOS The module transmits AIS as soon as LOS is detected. Send AIS if AIS is received The module transmits AIS if AIS is received.

4-114

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions

Configuration

4.9.12 SISA-0/N
SISA0-N Management Configuration

Terminal Redundancy Determines the protection switching mode of the system. This setting is decisive for the correct mapping of the QD2 information model onto functional groups. Modifications become active only after a SISA-0/N reset. In the regenerator mode (two terminals mounted back to back) with one OHAU, the operating mode must be adjusted both in the WEST terminal and EAST terminal. none No protection selected; operating mode N+0. Equipment protection Equipment protection (1+1 HSB) with one DPU STM-1 A002. Line protection (1xDPU, 2x radio w/o occasional traffic) 1+1 line protection switching with only one DPU STM-1 A002. Occasional traffic (OT) and XPIC operation are not possible. Line protection (n+m w/o occasional traffic) Line protection switching without occasional traffic; with RPSC/RPSI. Line protection (n+m with occasional traffic) Line protection switching with occasional traffic; with RPSC/RPSI.

RF/160 OI

4-115

Configuration

Operating Instructions

4.9.13 SISA-K/R

SISA-0

Display

4-116

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions

Configuration

Settings Configuration
NOTE: For detailed information on the configuration, please refer to the "SISA in microwave radio" Operator Manual, Ident. no. AN 00042537.

Config OSI 3 address This is the address of the SISA bus. If the address is 0, SISA-K/R does not respond to calls from the higher-order master element. 0...30 W/E Switch Address This value specifies the switchover address for the polling process. The selected value defines the network address up which the SISA-KR bus master is polling. Address n+1 and higher addresses are then polled by bus master East. Value 0 indicates that all network elements connected are polled by bus master East, while value 30 indicates that all elements are polled by bus master West. 0...30

RF/160 OI

4-117

Configuration

Operating Instructions

Port A

Protocol Primary (Master)


Mode OSI 1 RS 485 V.11/Y V.11/X.24 G.703 G.703-RF G.703-G.703 G.703-V.11 V.11-G.703 V.11-V.11 Bit Rate The following transmission rates can be selected: 1.2 kbit/s 2.4 kbit/s 4.8 kbit/s 9.6 kbit/s 19.2 kbit/s 64 kbit/s Operat. Mode Bus Point/Point Ring Doubling Router Two way Interface LCN DCN Timeout Primary Standard Extended

4-118

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions

Configuration

Delay Primary 3...5 ms 1...3 ms Priority Cycle On Off

Poll Cycle Standard Optimized UI Interval 1s 2.5 s 5s 7.5 s

RF/160 OI

4-119

Configuration

Operating Instructions

Port D

Protocol Secondary (Slave)


Mode OSI 1 RS 485 V.11/Y V.11/X.24 G.703 G.703-RF G.703-G.703 G.703-V.11 V.11-G.703 V.11-V.11 Bit Rate The following transmission rates can be selected. 1.2 kbit/s 2.4 kbit/s 4.8 kbit/s 9.6 kbit/s 19.2 kbit/s 64 kbit/s Operat. Mode Bus Point/Point Ring Doubling Interface LCN DCN

4-120

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions

Configuration

Port F

Protocol Secondary (Slave)


Mode OSI 1 RS232 Bit Rate 9600 19.2 k Operat. Mode Point/Point Parity Unkown None Even Odd Byte Distance Unkown 5 ms 10 ms 15 ms 20 ms

RF/160 OI

4-121

Configuration

Operating Instructions

Selection for Port A / Port D:

When used together with the QTN module, two port characteristics are relevant:
Microwave radio interface for SISA-K/R interface points to QTN: Mode OSI 1: Bit rate: Operating mode: Interface: Timeout Primary: G.703-RF (even if V.11 interface of QTN is used) 64 kbit/s Bus (bus or automatic ring configurations) Ring (SISA-K-controlled rings) DCN Standard (configurations up to 8 stations) Extended (configurations with more than 8 stations)

Local interface for SISA-K/R connected to the local QD2int (pseudo) bus: Mode OSI 1: Bit rate: Operating mode: Interface: Timeout Primary: RS485 64 kbit/s Bus LCN Standard (available only at port A)

Depending on the QTN operating mode, the following settings should be implemented: 1a) QTN
Bus service, head station Automatic ring, ring start SISA-K-controlled ring, master West SISA-K-controlled ring, master East

1b) SISA-K/R
A set to Microwave radio interface D set to Local interface

2a) QTN
Bus service, relay/terminal station Automatic ring, ring member SISA-K-controlled ring, slave

2b) SISA-K/R
A set to Local interface D set to Microwave radio interface

4-122

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions

Configuration

4.9.14 XQI
The XQI application permits station alarms to be passed on to the TMN system. For this purpose, the SISA-0/N module provides eight alarm contacts at connector X117 of an OHAU. These correspond to ME1 channels 1 to 8 in the XQI. These alarm inputs are floating inputs for relay contacts (NO or NC), door contacts etc.. ME1 channels 9 to 32 are not supported.

ME These eight inputs are configurable in ME-1.

RF/160 OI

4-123

Configuration

Operating Instructions

ME1

Administration Configuration

Each of the eight inputs can be selected separately. If a normally open contact (NO) (alarm with contact open) is to be monitored, the alarm polarity must be Active high. If a normally closed contact (NC) (alarm with contact closed) is to be monitored, the alarm polarity must be Active Low.

4-124

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions

Alignment

5 Alignment
5.1 Introduction
To permit hitless protection switching, the system must be aligned. The alignment process compensates the different delays of all channels. Thus, the switch itself receives synchronous data and can switch over from one side to the other without any loss of sync. The reference used for calculating the delay is always PR1. The present chapter describes how to align the entire system and how individual channels can be re-aligned. The alignment of a hot standby system will be described at the end of the chapter. Important: When opening the window for the first time, errors may be displayed (since the system has not yet been aligned, there will probably be alignment errors). The alignment must be performed using STM-1 signals without AIS. Otherwise this process will be interrupted. Ensure that no channel is injecting or receiving an AIS signal. Also ensure that the channels are not blocked. For the alignment process, the "Automatic" setting option for protection switching must be active for all operating channels. Protection channels must be sent to "Occasional traffic (OT) - loose" or "No occasional traffic (OT)". After an alignment or test process, the protection switching configuration of the system must be checked, because operating channels might be set to "Automatic off".

5.2

Display

Two different display modes are available, i.e. a graphical and a tabular display. Using the "Display" menu item, it is possible to switch over between these two display modes.

Both displays are subject to the following rules: blue = transmit-side and receive-side protection switching link green = active transmission (OP or PR) red = faulty transmission white = input box

RF/160 OI

5-1

Alignment

Operating Instructions

Graphical display The graphical display shows the individual transmission links sorted according to operating and protection channels. The transmit side (far end) is depicted on the left, the receive side with the local port on the right side. Depending on the system expansion, two N to 1 multiplexers (RPS-C, Radio Protection Switching) can be used to switch the operating channels to one protection channels. This is indicated by the vertical connecting lines and colors. A mark at the crossing point shows the multiplexer switching status. If a channel is available, the alarm data are displayed in the first column. Otherwise, the background remains dark grey. Tabular display The tabular display of the alignment mask gives a compact overview of the channels and their statuses The colors of the individual table cells are sorted according to columns and assigned according to the following scheme: Channel

red Channel failed/disturbed and protection switching failed/disturbed green a) Channel OK or b) Channel failed/disturbed, but protection switching OK red Channel not aligned green a) Channel aligned and protection switched or b) Channel aligned and Tx-side protection switching prepared red Channel failed/disturbed green Channel aligned and protection switched blue Channel aligned and Tx-side protection switching prepared

Measuring value

PR1/PR2 status

Meaning of alarms INT-A INT-B Align RPS-AIS

General alarm "Module defective" of the associated DPU module. General alarm "Module faulty" of the associated DPU module. Test switchover was not error-free. Channel is not correctly aligned. The associated DPU receives AIS in the protection switching block

Important: When opening the window for the first time, errors may be displayed (since the system has not yet been aligned, there will probably be alignment errors). The alignment must be performed using STM-1 signals without AIS. Otherwise this process will be cancelled. Ensure that no channel is injecting or receiving an AIS signal.

Also verify that no channel is locked. During the alignment process, the "Automatic" option must be active for all operating channels; protection channels must be set to "loose OT" or "no OT". After an alignment or test process, check the protection switching configuration of the system to ensure that operating channels are not set to "Automatic OFF".

5-2

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions

Alignment

5.3

Overall alignment

The overall alignment process can be started by clicking on the Settings | Align all menu items. The following request will be displayed:

Click the Yes button to start the alignment process. A status dialog displays which OP is tested with which PR all along the process:

If the process has been successfully executed, the following message will be displayed:

By clicking on 'Details', the delays between the PR1 reference channel and other channels will be displayed.

RF/160 OI

5-3

Alignment

Operating Instructions

All channels are now aligned and shouldn't display any more alarms:

5.4

Checking alignment data

A test is necessary to check the alignment data. This test can be started by clicking the Setting | Check all menu items. The following security request will be displayed:

Choose the Yes button to start the alignment value testing process. A status dialog displays which OP is tested with which PR all along the process:

5-4

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions

Alignment

If the process has been executed successfully, the following message will be displayed:

By clicking on 'Details', the delays between the PR1 reference channel and other channels will be displayed. These delays may possibly deviate from those displayed during the alignment process.

All channels are correctly aligned.

5.5

Selective alignment

By double-clicking the required channel, the following window will be displayed:

This channel can be tested or aligned only using the selected PR. The system protection switching test or system alignment is executed by selecting all channels. The 'Enhanced priority' option enables you to override the locked configuration of the selected channel(s).

RF/160 OI

5-5

Alignment

Operating Instructions

By double-clicking the delay option, the delay value can be changed (default value: 700 for N+M systems):

By double-clicking on the right side of the delay box, the following window will be displayed:

OP manual configuration

PR manual configuration

For more detailed information, please refer to DPU configuration.

5.6

Hot Standby or 1+1 without occasional traffic

In a 'Hot standby' or '1+1 without occasional traffic' configuration, only one DPU is available. The alignment memory of this DPU is divided up into 2 parts to create two virtual DPUs (OP1 and PR1).

The default delay value is now 350. The configuration and alignment processes are identical with those of an N+M system.

5-6

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions

Alignment

5.7

Alignment errors

If a channel could not be aligned, an error will be displayed. By clicking on 'Details', the errored channels will display a "couldn't be aligned" message instead of the calculated delay value. A faulty configuration in the far end (i.e. N+0) can lead to a system failure. In this case, check the protection switching configuration of the far end and ensure that the N+M protection switching mode, hot standby option or 1+1 configuration without OT has been selected. The alignment process is interrupted if at least one of the DPUs detects an AIS on the receive side. In this case, an information box will be displayed.

RF/160 OI

5-7

Alignment

Operating Instructions

This page has been left blank for editorial reasons.

5-8

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions

Alarms

6 Alarms
6.1 Standard module alarms
Select the following items

Module...

Alarms Alarm info Standard to activate the standard alarm window for a module (example: transmitter):

This mask represents the status of the standard alarms for all modules. In this conjunction, it is pointed out that - depending on the module type - the individual modules offer only a certain part of the complete set of alarms.

RF/160 OI

6-1

Alarms

Operating Instructions

Meaning of alarms:
Clock/Voltage Supply Faulty power supply

Failure of module-internal power supply. This alarm is signalled only for modules with an own power supply. Not signalled. Not signalled. Not signalled.

Fault clock supply Battery voltage outside nom. range Battery voltage outside op. range Module Management Communication failure Internal Module defective

Not signalled.

The module functioning is affected in such a way that the transmission of the traffic signal is severely disturbed or interrupted. This is a general alarm for the module. For more detailed information, please refer to module-specific alarms.

Module faulty

The module functioning is affected in such a way that the traffic signal transmitted includes bit errors.
This is a general alarm for the module. For more detailed information, please refer to the module-specific alarms. Hardware fault on the module. In consequence of this alarm, the "Module defective" alarm is also displayed.

Hardware defective Inconsistent configuration Faulty software status No free memory capacity Program memory not readable Data memory not readable

There is an inconsistent setting in the software configuration of the module. Not signalled. Not signalled. Not signalled. Not signalled.

6-2

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions

Alarms

6.2

Transmitter (Tx)
Alarms Alarm info Module family

Transmitter

RF power low The minimum Tx power of +10.5 dBm (+12 dBm for 13 GHz) is undershot by >3 dB. IF input signal The IF signal fails or is not correct. ATPC level error The nominal value of the RF output power deviates by >3 dB from the actual value. Manual operation The Tx output power control is deactivated.

RF/160 OI

6-3

Alarms

Operating Instructions

6.3

TX/RX oscillator

Tx oscillator Alarms Alarm info Module family

Local oscillator Failure of the DRVCO (LO). Cross-channel loss of sync Loss of sync of the LO (Slave) caused by the cross-polar transmitter/receiver (Master) in XPIC operation.

6-4

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions

Alarms

6.4

Main receiver

Main receiver Alarm info Module family

LOS The RF input power at X1 is < -90 dBm. Manual operation Sweep mode activated in the receiver or manual control of the IF control amplifier.

RF/160 OI

6-5

Alarms

Operating Instructions

6.5

Diversity receiver

Div. receiver Alarm info Module family

LOS diversity The RF input power at X21 is < -90 dBm. LOS at combiner input No valid IF signal at the IF combiner inputs X23 and X24. Manual operation Sweep mode activated in the receiver or manual control of the IF control amplifier.

6-6

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions

Alarms

6.6

Modem Unit

6.6.1 SPI STM-1 - Electrical


SPI STM-1 EL

Electrical STM-1 data interface

EL Alarms Alarm info Module family

LOS at input The STM-1 signal is missing at the BB input (loss of signal). Output signal fails The STM-1 signal is missing at the BB output. Reference clock The reference clock is not available. Code error at input The BB input signal includes code errors.

6.6.2 SPI STM-1 - Optical


RF/160 OI 6-7

Alarms SPI STM-1 OPT

Operating Instructions

Optical STM-1 data interface

OPT Alarms Alarm info Module family

Tx laser power < 70% of SOL This alarm is displayed if the output power of the Tx laser drops down to 70% of its initial power (Start Of Life, SOL) value. LOS at input Loss of signal at the data input.

6-8

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions

Alarms

6.6.3 RPSI STM-1

RPSI STM-1 Alarms Alarm info Module family

LOS at input The STM-1 signal from the RPSC is missing at the input (loss of signal). Output signal fails The STM-1 signal to the RPSC is missing at the RPSI output. Reference clock The reference clock is not available. Code error at input The STM-1 signal from the RPSC includes code errors.

RF/160 OI

6-9

Alarms

Operating Instructions

6.6.4 Modem Unit power supply

Modem unit power supply Alarms Alarm info Module family

Supply voltage Net 1 Secondary voltage outside nominal voltage range. +8.0 V +5.2 V +3.3 V -5.2 V -8.0 V Supply voltage Net 4 Secondary voltage outside nominal voltage range. +8.0 V -8.0 V

6-10

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions

Alarms

6.6.5 Modulator

MD 155/140... Alarms Alarm info Module family

No IF output signal Loss of the IF output level. Clock signal out of synchronization The clock recovery has not locked / is not in sync. IF carrier out of synchronization In the XPIC mode of the right MD (Slave) in the MU, clock recovery has not locked / is not in sync. No IF carrier synchronization signal The IF carrier signal of the cross-polar MD is not available in XPIC operation. General alarm of ASIC for baseband signal coding Internal ASIC alarm.

RF/160 OI

6-11

Alarms

Operating Instructions

6.6.6 Demodulator

DM 155/140... Alarms Alarm info Module family


64 QAM

Carrier recovery The IF carrier recovery has not locked. A/D converter output signal No valid output signal at the A/D converter. Radio clock monitoring No synchronization possible. No IF input signal No IF input signal at the DM input. No FEC synchronization The FEC cannot be synchronized to the signal applied. Line clock monitoring Detection of an ASIC failure. XPIC operation not possible This alarm is displayed if XPIC operation has been activated in the MU, but the DM (H, V) is not in sync. Elastic buffer overflow of XPE Overflow of the elastic memory for synchronization of the cross-polar signal.

6-12

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions 128 QAM

Alarms

Carrier recovery The IF carrier recovery has not locked. A/D converter output signal No valid output signal at the A/D converter. Radio clock monitoring No synchronization possible. No IF signal from other demodulator Missing IF carrier reference signal from other DM. Other demodulator not synchronized DMs are not synchronized. Reset of equalizer A reset of the equalizer has occurred. MLC decoder not synchronized The MLC decoder is out of sync. FIFO pointer collision in MLC decoder A FIFO pointer collision has occurred in the MLC decoder. XPIC operation not possible This alarm is displayed if XPIC operation has been activated in the MU, but the DM (H, V) is not in sync. Elastic buffer overflow of XPE Overflow of the elastic memory for synchronization of the cross-polar signal.

RF/160 OI

6-13

Alarms

Operating Instructions

6.6.7 Controller module


No alarms available.

6-14

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions

Alarms

6.6.8

DPU/RPS STM-1 Data Processing Unit

DPU/RPS STM-1 Alarms Alarm info Module family

RF/160 OI

6-15

Alarms

Operating Instructions

STM-1 Transmission Manual intervention The loopback feature and/or B1 inversion is active or AIS injection disabled in case of SES(B1). Line side LOS No correct data signal available at the DPU line side. LOF STM-1 No STM-1 frame synchronization possible. SES (B1) The signal on the line side has a BER >2E-5 (ITU-T G.826). J0-TIM The received path trace signal differs from the one expected (Trace Identifier Mismatch).

6-16

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions

Alarms

Radio side SES (B1) The signal on the radio side has a BER >2E-5 (ITU-T G.826). J0-TIM The received path trace signal differs from the one expected (Trace Identifier Mismatch). Radio hop identifier The received radio hop identifier differs from the one expected. LA Tx received A Tx side Line Alarm has been received. Operating channel LOS No correct data signal is available on the DPU radio side. LOF RFCOH No RFCOH frame synchronization possible. LOF STM-1 No STM-1 frame synchronization possible. Protection channel For 1+1 HSB or 1+1 with one DPU STM-1. LOS No correct data signal available on the DPU radio side. LOF RFCOH No RFCOH frame synchronization possible. LOF STM-1 No STM-1 frame synchronization possible.

RF/160 OI

6-17

Alarms

Operating Instructions

Protection switching Faulty CAN ring The CAN bus is faulty. Tx side PR channel LOS (PR from OP) The PR does not receive a correct signal from the line side (RPSI). LOF (PR from OP) No STM-1 frame synchronization of the PR possible from the line side (RPSI). Number of protection switchovers exceeded threshold The number of the Tx protection switching events is higher than the threshold (15 min). Rx side OP channel LOS (PR from OP) The OP does not receive a correct signal from the line side (RPSI). LOF (PR from OP) No STM-1 frame synchronization of the OP possible from the line side (RPSI). Alignment OP-PR The OP and PR are not aligned. No hitless protection switching possible. Should this alarm occur when an already aligned system is switched on, the OP affected must be manually switched over to a PR for a short time. If the alarm does still not disappear, a selective alignment must be performed for the corresponding OP. Number of protection switchovers exceeded threshold The number of the Rx protection switching events is higher than the threshold adjusted (15 min). Protection switching could not be performed No successful protection switching possible.

6-18

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions

Alarms

6.7

RPSC + RPSH modules

6.7.1 RPSC module


RPS-C Alarms Alarm info Module family

Faulty hardware configuration Faulty hardware configuration. Power supply Defective power supply. CAN bus The CAN bus is faulty.

RF/160 OI

6-19

Alarms

Operating Instructions

6.7.2 RPSH module


RPS-H Alarms Alarm info Module family

Power supply Defective power supply. CAN communication The CAN bus is faulty.

6-20

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions

Alarms

6.8

Overhead Access Unit (OHAU)

6.8.1 OHAU power supply

OHAU power supply Alarms Alarm info Module family

Secondary voltage outside nominal voltage range.


+12.0 V +3.3 V +5.2 V -12.0 V

RF/160 OI

6-21

Alarms

Operating Instructions

6.8.2 RFCOH Access Module

RFCOH access Alarms Alarm info Module family

DSC1...4 + WSC Operating channel DSC1...DSC4 Service channels 1...4 are faulty. WSC The wayside channel (2048 k) is faulty.

6-22

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions

Alarms

Receive direction No connection / DPU disconnected Write and read-only mode disturbed. LOS Loss of input signal. OOF DSC Loss of sync of the input signal. OOF WSC Loss of sync of the input signal. AIS (in) DSC1...DSC4 AIS is injected in the input signal. WSC AIS is injected in the input signal.

Transmit direction No connection / DPU disconnected Write and read-only mode disturbed. Multiple write access DSC Write mode disturbed. Multiple write access WSC Write mode disturbed. AIS (in) DSC1...DSC4 AIS is injected in the input signal. WSC -AIS is injected in the input signal.

RF/160 OI

6-23

Alarms

Operating Instructions

DSC1...4 + WSC Protection channel DSC1...DSC4 Service channels 1...4 are faulty. WSC The wayside channel (2048 k) is faulty.

6-24

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions

Alarms

Receive direction No connection / DPU disconnected Write and read-only mode disturbed. LOS Loss of input signal. OOF DSC Loss of sync of the input signal. OOF WSC Loss of sync of the input signal. AIS (in) DSC1...DSC4 AIS injected in input signal. WSC AIS injected in input signal.

Transmit direction No connection / DPU disconnected Write and read-only mode disturbed. Multiple write access DSC Write mode disturbed. Multiple write access WSC Write mode disturbed. AIS (in) DSC1...DSC4 AIS injected in input signal. WSC AIS injected in input signal.

RF/160 OI

6-25

Alarms

Operating Instructions

DSC5...8 Operating channel DSC5...DSC8 -Service channel 5...8 is faulty.

6-26

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions

Alarms

Receive direction No connection / DPU disconnected Write and read-only mode disturbed. LOS Loss of input signal. OOF DSC Loss of sync of the input signal. AIS (in) DSC5...DSC8 AIS injected in input signal.

Transmit direction No connection / DPU disconnected Write and read-only mode disturbed. Multiple write access DSC Write mode disturbed. AIS (in) DSC5...DSC8 AIS injected in input signal.

RF/160 OI

6-27

Alarms

Operating Instructions

DSC5...8 Protection channel DSC5...DSC8 Service channel 1...4 is faulty.

6-28

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions

Alarms

Receive direction No connection / DPU disconnected Write and read-only mode disturbed. LOS Loss of input signal. OOF DSC Loss of sync of the input signal. AIS (in) DSC5...DSC8 AIS injected in input signal. WSC AIS injected in input signal.

Transmit direction No connection / DPU disconnected Write and read-only mode disturbed. Multiple write access DSC Write mode disturbed. AIS (in) DSC5...DSC8 AIS injected in input signal.

RF/160 OI

6-29

Alarms

Operating Instructions

6.8.3 EOW module

EOW #1 Alarms Alarm info Module family

Transmission from West Transmission from the West direction is disturbed. East Transmission from the East direction is disturbed. North Transmission from the North direction is disturbed.

6-30

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions

Alarms

6.8.4 QTN module

QTN Alarms Alarm info Module family

Interface A LOS Loss of input signal at interface A. AIS AIS applied to interface A. Interface B LOS Loss of input signal at interface B. AIS AIS applied to interface B.

RF/160 OI

6-31

Alarms

Operating Instructions

6.8.5 ECC Gateway module


ECC Gateway Alarms Alarm info Module family

General No LAN connection No connection at the LAN interface. West ECC communication lost ECC transmission disturbed on the West side. East ECC communication lost ECC transmission disturbed on the East side.

6-32

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions

Alarms

6.8.6 SOH Access Module


SOH access Alarms Alarm info Module family

West: Operating Channel 1 DSC1...DSC4 Failure of 64 kbit/s service channels DSC1...DSC4. WSC Failure of the 2048 kbit/s wayside channel. E1 Failure of the 64 kbit/s service channel E1. F1 Failure of the 64 kbit/s service channel F1.

RF/160 OI

6-33

Alarms Receive direction No connection / DPU disconnected Write and read-only mode disturbed. LOS Loss of input signal. OOF DSC Loss of sync of the input signal. OOF WSC Loss of sync of the input signal.

Operating Instructions

AIS (in) DSC1...DSC4 AIS is injected in the input signal. WSC AIS is injected in the input signal. E1 AIS is injected in the input signal. F1 AIS is injected in the input signal.

6-34

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions

Alarms

Transmit direction No connection / DPU disconnected Write and read-only mode disturbed. AIS (in) DSC1...DSC4 AIS is injected in the input signal. WSC AIS is injected in the input signal. E1 AIS is injected in the input signal. F1 AIS is injected in the input signal.

RF/160 OI

6-35

Alarms

Operating Instructions

West: Protection Channel 1 DSC1...DSC4 Failure of 64 kbit/s service channels DSC1...DSC4. WSC Failure of the 2048 kbit/s wayside channel. E1 Failure of the 64 kbit/s service channel E1. F1 Failure of the 64 kbit/s service channel F1.

Receive direction No connection / DPU disconnected Write and read-only mode disturbed. LOS Loss of input signal OOF DSC Loss of sync of the input signal. OOF WSC Loss of sync of the input signal.

6-36

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions

Alarms

AIS (in) DSC1...DSC4 AIS is injected in the input signal. WSC AIS is injected in the input signal. E1 AIS is injected in the input signal. F1 AIS is injected in the input signal.

Transmit direction No connection / DPU disconnected Write and read-only mode disturbed. AIS (in) DSC1...DSC4 AIS is injected in the input signal. WSC AIS is injected in the input signal. E1 AIS is injected in the input signal. F1 AIS is injected in the input signal.

RF/160 OI

6-37

Alarms

Operating Instructions

East: Operating Channel 1 DSC1...DSC4 Failure of 64 kbit/s service channels DSC1...DSC4. WSC Failure of the 2048 kbit/s wayside channel. E1 Failure of the 64 kbit/s service channel E1. F1 Failure of the 64 kbit/s service channel F1.

Receive direction No connection / DPU disconnected Write and read-only mode disturbed. LOS Loss of input signal. OOF DSC Loss of sync of the input signal. OOF WSC Loss of sync of the input signal.

6-38

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions AIS (in) DSC1...DSC4 AIS is injected in the input signal. WSC AIS is injected in the input signal. E1 AIS is injected in the input signal. F1 AIS is injected in the input signal.

Alarms

Transmit direction No connection / DPU disconnected Write and read-only mode disturbed. AIS (in) DSC1...DSC4 AIS is injected in the input signal. WSC AIS is injected in the input signal. E1 AIS is injected in the input signal. F1 AIS is injected in the input signal.

RF/160 OI

6-39

Alarms

Operating Instructions

East: Protection Channel 1 DSC1...DSC4 Failure of 64 kbit/s service channels DSC1...DSC4. WSC Failure of the 2048 kbit/s wayside channel. E1 Failure of the 64 kbit/s service channel E1. F1 Failure of the 64 kbit/s service channel F1.

6-40

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions

Alarms

Receive direction No connection / DPU disconnected Write and read-only mode disturbed. LOS Loss of input signal. OOF DSC Loss of sync of the input signal. OOF WSC Loss of sync of the input signal. AIS (in) DSC1...DSC4 AIS is injected in the input signal. WSC AIS is injected in the input signal. E1 AIS is injected in the input signal. F1 AIS is injected in the input signal.

Transmit direction No connection / DPU disconnected Write and read-only mode disturbed.

RF/160 OI

6-41

Alarms

Operating Instructions

AIS (in) DSC1...DSC4 AIS is injected in the input signal. WSC AIS is injected in the input signal. E1 AIS is injected in the input signal. F1 AIS is injected in the input signal.

6-42

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions

Alarms

6.8.7 SOH Extension

SOH extension Alarms Alarm info Module family

E2 The 64 kbit/s service channel E2 is faulty.

RF/160 OI

6-43

Alarms

Operating Instructions

Receive direction LOS Loss of input signal. AIS (in) E2 AIS is injected in the input signal.

Transmit direction AIS (in) E2 AIS is injected in the input signal.

6-44

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions

Alarms

6.8.8 SISA-0/N

SISA0-N Alarms Alarm info Standard

Internal Module defective General module alarm Hardware defective Inconsistent configuration Deviation between nominal and actual equipment with modules

RF/160 OI

6-45

Alarms

Operating Instructions

6.8.9 SISA-K/R
See separate manual.

6-46

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions

Alarms

6.8.10 XQI
See separate XQI manual.

RF/160 OI

6-47

Alarms

Operating Instructions

6.9

Alignment / OP/PR channel failure

Via the Rack View menu, it is possible to open the Alignment window and request failures of operating channels OP 0...14 and protection channels PR 1...2. The operator can define whether he wants to get the required information in graphical or tabular form. The alignment is required for hitless protection switching without bit errors.

6-48

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions

Alarms

Display Graphical

INT-A General alarm "Module defective" of the associated DPU module INT-B General alarm "Module faulty" of the associated DPU module Align Test switchover not error-free, since channel is not correctly aligned. RPS-AIS Associated DPU receives AIS in protection switching block.

RF/160 OI

6-49

Alarms

Operating Instructions

Display Tabular

INT-A General alarm "Module defective" of the associated DPU module. RPS-AIS The associated DPU receives AIS in the protection switching block.

6-50

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions

Measuring Values/Thresholds and Performance Counters

7 Measuring Values/Thresholds and Performance Counters


Using the Service PC, it is possible to request measuring values and enter thresholds for these. Only in the active menu and on updating the information displayed by the logic module, an overshooting of the threshold values entered is spontanously signalled. At the corresponding module, such an alarm is not displayed.
Restrictions The number of QMP data sets (records) on a SISA0-N module is limited so that not all performance counters available can be monitored with the full storage depth. As soon as the maximally adjustable number is exceeded, the network element will send a negative acknowledgement. Independent of the degree of system expansion, a total number of 19324 bytes are available for QMP data sets (records). A 15-min. data set requires a memory capacity of 18 bytes, a 24-h data set 29 bytes.

In case of a terminal with 14+2 configuration, the following performance measuring points are accessible at functional group level: 16 x RTF or RTFE: 16 16 x RRTF: 16 1 x PSU: 14 These 46 points can be activated with a storage depth of 4 x 15 minutes and 2 x 24 hours. In addition, the storage depth of three points can be increased to 100 x 15 minutes, that of ten points can be increased to 30 x 24 hours. The total memory capacity occupied is calculated as follows: QMPs 46 3 + 3 46 10 10 x x x x x x x Storage depth 4 (15 min.) 4 (15 min.) 100 (15 min.) 2 2 30 (24h) (24h) (24h) : QMP data sets Memory capacity : 184 : - 12 : + 300 472 x 18 bytes: 8496 bytes : : : + 92 - 20 + 300 372

x 29 Bytes:

10788 bytes 19284 bytes

Memory capacity occupied:

7.1

Overview of performance counters available


Test point RS No. 1 Function Interruption (LOS) of the CMI input signal at the electrical BB interface Interruption (LOS) of the CMI input signal (from RPSC module) at the RPSI module Interruption (LOS) of the input signal at the optical BB interface RST parity check of the B1 bytes received on the radio side without taking account of protection switching acc. to ITU-T G.826 Display in SOA -

Module SPIE

RPSI SPIO DPU

RS RS RS radio side

1 1 3

Only N+0 / N+M: RRTF-1 MP no. 1 -

MS radio side

MST parity check of the B2 bytes received on the radio side without taking account of protection switching acc. to ITU-T G.826

RF/160 OI

7-1

Measuring Values/Thresholds and Performance Counters

Operating Instructions

RS line side MS line side RS RPS

5 6 7

PSE(OPx->BBx)

RST parity check of the B1 byte received on the line side acc. to ITU-T G.826 MST parity check of the B2 bytes received on the line side acc. to ITU-T G.826 RST parity check of the B1 bytes received on the radio side taking protection switching (N+M, HSB) acc. to ITU-T G.826 into account Number of automatic Rx-side protection switching processes (N+M and HSB)

RTF-1 / RTFE-1 MP no. 1 Only HSB: RRTF-1 MP no. 1 Only N+M: PSU MP no. x (x=1...14)

7.2

Transmitter

By activating the masks Transmitter Performance Measuring values/thresholds the following parameters can be set and requested:

1. 2. 3. 4.

Actual value of transmit level (accuracy: 1 dB). Nominal value of the transmit level Control voltage for the RF amplifier Temperature in the transmitter (min / max: 10C / +85)

7-2

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions

Measuring Values/Thresholds and Performance Counters

TX oscillator Performance Measuring values/thresholds

1.

Oscillator control loop voltage

RF/160 OI

7-3

Measuring Values/Thresholds and Performance Counters

Operating Instructions

7.3

Main receiver

Main receiver Performance Measuring values/thresholds

1.

Linearized Rx level display Accuracy: 2 dB in the range from -30 dBm to -70 dBm at room temperature

7-4

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions

Measuring Values/Thresholds and Performance Counters

RX oscillator Performance Measuring values/thresholds

1.

Oscillator control loop voltage

RF/160 OI

7-5

Measuring Values/Thresholds and Performance Counters

Operating Instructions

7.4

Diversity receiver

Div. Receiver Performance Measuring values/thresholds

1.

Linearized Rx level display Accuracy: 2 dB in the range from -30 dBm to -70 dBm at room temperature

7-6

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions

Measuring Values/Thresholds and Performance Counters

7.5

Modem Unit

7.5.1 SPI STM-1 - Electrical

EL Performance Current 15-min. performance counters

EL Performance Current 24-h performance counters

RF/160 OI

7-7

Measuring Values/Thresholds and Performance Counters

Operating Instructions

EL Performance 15-min. performance values

EL Performance 24-h performance values

7-8

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions

Measuring Values/Thresholds and Performance Counters

EL Performance Performance measuring points

RF/160 OI

7-9

Measuring Values/Thresholds and Performance Counters

Operating Instructions

7.5.2 SPI STM-1 - Optical

OPT Performance Current 15-min. performance counters

OPT Performance Current 24-h performance counters

7-10

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions

Measuring Values/Thresholds and Performance Counters

OPT Performance 15-min. performance values

OPT Performance 24-h performance values

RF/160 OI

7-11

Measuring Values/Thresholds and Performance Counters

Operating Instructions

OPT Performance Performance measuring points

OPT Performance Measuring values/ thresholds

1. 2.

Laser transmit level The value is displayed in percent related to the SOL (start of life) value. Laser diode current

These threshold values are factory settings and cannot be changed.

7-12

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions

Measuring Values/Thresholds and Performance Counters

7.5.3 RPSI STM-1

RPSI STM-1 Performance Current 15-min. performance counters

RPSI STM-1 Performance Current 24-h performance counters

RF/160 OI

7-13

Measuring Values/Thresholds and Performance Counters

Operating Instructions

RPSI STM-1 Performance 15-min. performance values

RPSI STM-1 Performance 24-h performance values

7-14

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions

Measuring Values/Thresholds and Performance Counters

RPSI STM-1 Performance Performance measuring points

RF/160 OI

7-15

Measuring Values/Thresholds and Performance Counters

Operating Instructions

7.5.4 Modem Unit power supply


No measuring values and thresholds available.

7-16

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions

Measuring Values/Thresholds and Performance Counters

7.5.5 Modulator
No measuring values and thresholds available.

RF/160 OI

7-17

Measuring Values/Thresholds and Performance Counters

Operating Instructions

7.5.6 Demodulator

DM 155/140... Performance Measuring values/thresholds

No thresholds adjustable for the eye pattern.

7-18

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions

Measuring Values/Thresholds and Performance Counters

7.5.7 Controller module


No measuring values and thresholds available.

RF/160 OI

7-19

Measuring Values/Thresholds and Performance Counters

Operating Instructions

7.5.8 DPU/RPS STM-1 Data Processing Unit

DPU/RPS STM-1 Performance Current 15-min. performance counters

The performance data are based on the performance calculation in compliance with ITU-T G.826.

7-20

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions

Measuring Values/Thresholds and Performance Counters

RS radio side

RST parity check of the radio-side B1 bytes without protection switching (n+m).

MS radio side

MST parity check of the radio-side B2 bytes without protection switching (n+m).

RS line side

RST parity check of the line-side B1 byte.

RF/160 OI

7-21

Measuring Values/Thresholds and Performance Counters MS line side

Operating Instructions

MST parity check of the line-side B2 bytes.

RS RPS

RST parity check of the radio-side B1 bytes after protection switching (n+m, HSB).

PSE OP1 -> BB1

Number of automatic Rx protection switching events (n+m, HSB)

7-22

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions

Measuring Values/Thresholds and Performance Counters

DPU/RPS STM-1 Performance Current 24-h performance counters

RS radio side

RST parity check of the radio-side B1 byte without protection switching (n+m).

MS radio side

MST parity check of the radio-side B2 bytes without protection switching (n+m).

RF/160 OI

7-23

Measuring Values/Thresholds and Performance Counters

Operating Instructions

RS line side

RST parity check of the line-side B1 byte.

MS line side

MST parity check of the line-side B2 bytes.

7-24

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions

Measuring Values/Thresholds and Performance Counters

RS RPS

RST parity check of the radio-side B1 byte after protection switching (n+m, HSB).

PSE OP1 -> BB1

Number of automatic Rx protection switching events (n+m, HSB).

RF/160 OI

7-25

Measuring Values/Thresholds and Performance Counters

Operating Instructions

DPU/RPS STM-1 Performance 15-min. performance values

RS radio side

RST parity check of the radio-side B1 byte without protection switching (n+m).

MS radio side

MST parity check of the radio-side B2 bytes without protection switching (n+m).

7-26

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions

Measuring Values/Thresholds and Performance Counters

RS line side

MST parity check of the line-side B1 bytes

MS line side

MST parity check of the line-side B2 bytes.

RF/160 OI

7-27

Measuring Values/Thresholds and Performance Counters

Operating Instructions

RS RPS

RST parity check of the radio-side B1 byte after protection switching (n+m, HSB).

PSE OP1 -> BB1

Number of automatic Rx protection switching events (n+m, HSB).

7-28

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions

Measuring Values/Thresholds and Performance Counters

DPU/RPS STM-1 Performance 24-h performance values

RS radio side

RST parity check of the radio-side B1 byte without protection switching (n+m).

MS radio side

MST parity check of the radio-side B2 bytes without protection switching (n+m).

RF/160 OI

7-29

Measuring Values/Thresholds and Performance Counters

Operating Instructions

RS line side

RST parity check of the line-side B1 byte.

MS line side

MST parity check of the line-side B2 bytes.

7-30

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions

Measuring Values/Thresholds and Performance Counters

RS RPS

RST parity check of the radio-side B1 bytes after protection switching (n+m, HSB).

PSE OP1 -> BB1

Number of automatic Rx protection switching events (n+m, HSB).

RF/160 OI

7-31

Measuring Values/Thresholds and Performance Counters

Operating Instructions

DPU/RPS STM-1 Performance Performance measuring points

7-32

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions

Measuring Values/Thresholds and Performance Counters

7.6

RPSC + RPSH module

No measuring values and thresholds available.

RF/160 OI

7-33

Measuring Values/Thresholds and Performance Counters

Operating Instructions

7.7

OHAU Overhead Access Unit

7.7.1 OHAU power supply


No measuring values and thresholds available.

7-34

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions

Measuring Values/Thresholds and Performance Counters

7.7.2 RFCOH Access Module


No measuring values and thresholds available.

RF/160 OI

7-35

Measuring Values/Thresholds and Performance Counters

Operating Instructions

7.7.3 EOW module


No measuring values and thresholds available.

7-36

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions

Measuring Values/Thresholds and Performance Counters

7.7.4 QTN module


No measuring values and thresholds available.

RF/160 OI

7-37

Measuring Values/Thresholds and Performance Counters

Operating Instructions

7.7.5 SOH Access Module


No measuring values and thresholds available.

7-38

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions

Measuring Values/Thresholds and Performance Counters

7.7.6 SOH Extension module


No measuring values and thresholds available.

RF/160 OI

7-39

Measuring Values/Thresholds and Performance Counters

Operating Instructions

7.7.7 SISA-0/N module


No measuring values and thresholds available.

7-40

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions

Measuring Values/Thresholds and Performance Counters

7.7.8 SISA-K/R
No measuring values and thresholds available.

RF/160 OI

7-41

Measuring Values/Thresholds and Performance Counters

Operating Instructions

7.7.9 XQI
ME1

Alarms

The selected alarm inputs can be enabled or disabled. Two priorities are possible:
1=Low 2=High

7-42

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions

Software, Equipment and Configuration Management

8 Software, Equipment and Configuration Management


8.1 Required operator software
The following software is required for system operation:

MSP Basic Software, Version 2.16 MSP Application MDRS 155 E, Version 1.21 Management, configuration and monitoring of the microwave radio system at module level MSP Application SISA-V, Version 2.09 SISA-0/N Software Update via MSP MSP Application SISA-KR, Version 1.02 Installation and operation of QD2 bus networks MSP Application XQI, Version 2.06 Configuration of user inputs (relay contacts)

8.2

Software download to system modules

Using the menu items Hardware view Modules Administration File transfer all modules except SISA-0/N and SISA-KR can be loaded with new application software. For this purpose, an appropriate control file (extension .CTL) must be available, which is used by the download routine to determine the application to be downloaded to the individual modules. A document with detailed SW download instructions is supplied with each system software release. To avoid a bus overload, NE alarms should not be requested during the download process.
4

8.3

OSI parameter file transfer to the ECC Gateway Module

Using the menu items Hardware view Modules Administration File transfer new OSI parameters can be downloaded to the ECC Gateway module. For this purpose, the OSI.CTL and OSI.XML files must be available in a directory. The download routine uses the OSI.CTL control file to extract the name of the OSI.XML parameter file. Depending on the size of this parameter file, the file transfer may take several seconds to some minutes. After a self-test of the ECC Gateway module, the OSI stack starts to operate with the new parameters.

The SISA0 application is required for this purpose. 8-1

RF/160 OI

Software, Equipment and Configuration Management

Operating Instructions

The parameter file can be edited, so that any OSI parameter values supported by the ECC Gateway module can be downloaded. Caution: In order to be able to set up an ECC connection, the OSI parameters of the ECC Gateway modules involved must be identical. This prerequisite is not fulfilled before all ECC Gateway modules have received their new parameters. This means to download parameters to an ECC Gateway module located in an NE addressable only via the ECC, the corresponding parameters must first be downloaded to this remote NE before they can be downloaded to the ECC Gateway module located in the local NE.

8.4

OSI parameter upload from the ECC Gateway module


Hardware view Modules Administration File transfer

Using the menu items

the OSI parameters used by an ECC Gateway module can be uploaded. For this purpose, the OSIUPL.CTL file must be available. The upload routine uses the OSIUPL.CTL control file to extract the name of the OSI.UPL parameter file. Depending on the size of the parameter file, the upload process may take several seconds to some minutes. The OSI.UPL file is saved to the same directory as the OSI.CTL file. The upload file is composed of three parts. Part 1 (ACTUAL OSI-PARAMETERS) shows the OSI parameters actually used by the ECC Gateway module. Part 2 (INITIALIZATION FILE) shows the permanently stored OSI parameters used for initialization after the first OSI parameter file transfer. These can be extracted and transferred to further NEs. Part 3 (LOG FILE) shows fault reports that may occur when the stored parameter file is edited.

8.5

Saving and loading equipment configuration data


Hardware view Modules
Equipment overview...Module group ...Module...

Using the menu items

File NE > File

each customer-specific configuration can be saved to a file memorized in the Service PC. This is possible both for the complete equipment (Terminal East or West), a module group (RFU OPx, Modem OPx, OHAUx, ...) or an individual module (e.g. Main Receiver, DPU, SOH Access etc.). The configuration data of all modules below the hierarchy level from which the "NE > File function has been activated are saved.

8-2

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions

Software, Equipment and Configuration Management

The same applies to the downloading of memorized settings to modules using the File > NE function. Thus, a unit can be loaded with the complete configuration data so that a separate configuration of the individual modules is no longer necessary.

8.6

Creating a system data table

Using the menu items Hardware view Modules Administration System data a table is called up which gives an overview of all modules available in the network element together with the nameplate data and module software versions. This table can be saved as normal text file or as CSV file and can be easily imported to other applications.

8.7

Adjusting the system time

The system clock on the SISA0-N card is not battery-buffered, i.e. after a power outage both the date and time are reset to default values (01.01.1900, 00:00). If the network element is connected to a SOA network, it is automatically synchronized once a day. In the MDRS 155 E application, the date and time of the locally connected Service PC can be taken over by the SISA0 functional group: FG SISA0 Administration Status Edit Take over current time

RF/160 OI

8-3

Software, Equipment and Configuration Management

Operating Instructions

This page has been left blank for editorial reasons.

8-4

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions

What is when? Troubleshooting

9 What is when? Troubleshooting


9.1 Module replacement

9.1.1 Safety instructions


For replacing modules, please note the following instructions: On the fuse panel, switch off the power supply unit provided for the modules you want to replace. Do not forget that the DPU, Controller, RPSI, SPI-el. and SPI opt. modules of the Modem Unit are supplied redundantly. Pull out or plug in the control and operating voltage cables on the Modem Unit, OHAU, transmitter and receiver modules only with the power supply switched off (exception: RPS-C and RPS-H). Extract or insert the following modules only with the power supply switched off: Modulator Demodulator SOH Access Power Supply = = = = MD DM SOHA PS (in Modem Unit) (in Modem Unit) (in OHAU) (in OHAU and Modem Unit)

Since it is necessary to replace modules in operation, the relevant processes are described in this chapter in such a way that only the corresponding modules can be replaced with the power supply switched on.

9.1.2 Module replacement - effects on the STM-1 signal


Module 1+1 hot standby STM-1 signal in operating mode: N+m w/o XPIC N+m with XPIC

w/o error Receiver RX Transmitter TX RPS-C RPS-H SPI electr. SPI optical RPSI MUPS MD/DM Controller DPU Module OHAU PS RFCOH EOW QTN SISA-K/R ECC Gateway SOH/SOH ext. SISA-0/N
X X X

Bit error

Failure

w/o error
X X X

Bit error

Failure

w/o error

Bit error
X X

Failure

X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X

X X X X X X X

w/o error

No SOA
X

Failure
X X X

Service channels w/o No Failure error SOA


X X X

w/o error

No SOA
X

Failure
X X X

X X X X X

X X X X

X X

X X X X X

RF/160 OI

9-1

What is when? Troubleshooting

Operating Instructions

9.2

Replacing modules
When replacing the transmitter, please observe the sequence described below in order to avoid operational interferences in other channels.
X1 RF X1

9.2.1 Transmitter TX
RF

1. Save the current configuration. Note: If this is not possible, you must perform the configuration using the backup copy available in the station or configure the transmitter manually (see step 6). 2. In case of redundant systems, disable both the channel to be exchanged and the automatic switchover function.
The corresponding channel and protecting switching function must be disabled in both the local station and far end.

3. Switch off the circuit breaker of the corresponding channel.


With XPIC systems, bit errors will occur for up to 5 s in the XPIC partner channel. In case of non-redundant systems, transmission will be interrupted.
MU CONT X4 MU CONT X4

4. Replace the transmitter. - Set up again all connections except the IF cable connection. - When doing this, ensure that the connectors are correctly positioned. 5. Switch on the channel again.
In case of XPIC systems, bit errors will occur for up to 5 s in the XPIC partner channel.

OPT X5 OPT X5

6. Download the configuration using the appropriate backup file. If this file is not available, configure the unit manually. Deactivate the ATPC function. Set the output power to its minimum value. 7. Connect the IF cable. This may temporarily lead to bit errors in the direct adjacent channels. 8. Activate the ATPC function. 9. Check the system data and make sure that the nameplate data and software version correspond with the current status. 10. Enable again the protection switching function.
BAT

11. Switch over to the automatic mode.


BAT BAT X3 IF X2 IF X2 X1 SYN X2 SYN BAT X3

X1

X2

9-2

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions

What is when? Troubleshooting

9.2.2 Receiver RX
IF COMB X25 BAT

1. Save the configuration. If this is no longer possible, use the configuration data stored in the station.
X3

2. In case of redundant systems, disable both the channel to be exchanged and protection switchover.
MU CONTR IF COMB X24 IF X22 IF COMB X23 IF X2 X4

The corresponding channel and protecting switching function must be disabled in both the local station and far end.

3. Switch off the defective channel by means of the fuse.


With XPIC systems, bit errors will occur for up to 5 s in the XPIC partner channel. In case of non-redundant systems, transmission will be interrupted.

BAT

4. Replace the corresponding unit. In doing this, ensure that the connectors are correctly positioned. 5. Switch on the channel again.
REC X5

In case of XPIC systems, bit errors will occur for up to 5 s in the XPIC partner channel.

6. Download the configuration using the appropriate file. If this file is not available, configure the unit as required. 7. Check the system data and make sure that the nameplate data and software version correspond with the current status. 8. Enable again the protection switching function.
X1 SYN X2

RF X21

RF X1

9. Switch over to the automatic mode.

RF/160 OI

9-3

What is when? Troubleshooting

Operating Instructions

9.2.3 RPS-C

1. Block all OP channels against switchover. 2. On the new RPS-C unit, adjust the correct address. 3. Remove the RPS-C unit currently still mounted. 4. Change the connecting cables 1:1. 5. Mount the new RPS-C unit. 6. Check the system data and make sure that the nameplate data and software version correspond with the current status.

9.2.4 RPS-H

1. Switch off the ATPC function. 2. Block the DPU against switchover (RX and TX). 3. Remove the RPS-H unit still mounted. 4. Pull out the X13 plug connector (TX switch). 5. Change the cables 1:1. 6. Plug in again connector X13 (TX switch). 7. Mount the new RPS-H unit. 8. Check the system data and make sure that the nameplate data and software version correspond with the current status. 9. Activate the ATPC function. 10. Switch over to the automatic mode.

9-4

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions

What is when? Troubleshooting

9.2.5 Modem Unit

X73 IF1 X74 IF1 PR1/1 X92 X90 PR1/2 X91 X89 X81 LON W X55 ROH 1B X83 CAN W X87 RX1 X61 ROH 2B IF2 X82 LON E X63 ROH A X78 RC X85 TX1 X88 RX2 X77 MST-ADR IF2

X75

X76 PR2/1 X95 X99

X79

BFI-ESG

X53

SOH 1B

X84

CAN E

X86

TX2

X59

SOH 2B + X72 BAT2 19...75V DC

X96 X100 PR2/2

+ X71 BAT1 19...75V DC X51

SOH 1A

X70

DCCR

X57

SOH 2A

RPSI

PS
BAT

MD

DPU RPS
TX RX OP PR1 PR2 SYN TX SWITCH LOCK

CTRL

DM

DM

DPU RPS
TX RX OP PR1 PR2 SYN TX SWITCH LOCK

MD

PS
BAT

RPSI

MAN

MAN

SPI

SPI

STM-1 1

STM-1

9.2.5.1 SPI STM-1 electrical


1. Remove the BB cable.
The STM-1 signal will also be interrupted with PR operation.

2. 3. 4.

Replace the SPI-STM-1 module. Plug in again the BB cable. Check the system data and make sure that the nameplate data and software version correspond with the current status.

RF/160 OI

9-5

What is when? Troubleshooting

Operating Instructions

9.2.5.2 SPI STM-1 optical


1. Remove the BB cable.
The STM-1 signal will also be interrupted with PR operation.

2. 3. 4.

Replace the SPI-STM-1 module. Plug in again the BB cable. Check the system data and make sure that the nameplate data and software version correspond with the current status.

9.2.5.3 RPSI STM-1


1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Block the OP channel against switchover. Replace the RPSI-STM-1 module. Check the system data and make sure that the nameplate data and software version correspond with the current status. Enable again the protection switching function. Switch over to the automatic mode.

9.2.5.4 Modem Unit Power Supply


1. 2. In case of redundant systems, disable the channel to be exchanged. Disable the protection switching function.
The corresponding channel and protecting switching function must be disabled in both the local station and far end.

3.

Switch off the defective channel by means of the circuit breaker.


With XPIC systems, bit errors will occur for up to 5 s in the XPIC partner channel. In case of non-redundant systems, transmission will be interrupted.

4. 5.

Exchange the Modem Unit power supply. Switch on again the channel.
In case of XPIC systems, bit errors will occur for up to 5 s in the XPIC partner channel.

6. 7. 8.

Check the system data and make sure that the nameplate data and software version correspond with the current status. Enable again the protection switching function. Switch over to the automatic mode.

9-6

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions

What is when? Troubleshooting

9.2.5.5 Modulator / Demodulator


1. Save the configuration. If this is no longer possible, use the configuration data stored in the station. 2. In case of redundant systems, disable both the channel to be exchanged and protection switchover.
The corresponding channel and protecting switching function must be disabled in both the local station and far end.

3. Switch off the defective channel by means of the circuit breaker.


With XPIC systems, bit errors will occur for up to 5 s in the XPIC partner channel. In case of non-redundant systems, transmission will be interrupted.

4. Replace the modulator/demodulator. In doing this, ensure that the connectors are correctly positioned. 5. Switch the channel on again.
In case of XPIC systems, bit errors will occur for up to 5 s in the XPIC partner channel.

6. Download the configuration using the appropriate file. If this file is not available, configure the unit as required. 7. Check the system data and make sure that the nameplate data and software version correspond with the current status. 8. Enable again the protection switching function. 9. Switch over to the automatic mode.

9.2.5.6 Controller
1. 2. Replace the Controller module. Check the system data and make sure that the nameplate data and software version correspond with the current status.

RF/160 OI

9-7

What is when? Troubleshooting

Operating Instructions

9.2.5.7 DPU/RPS STM-1


1. 2. Save the configuration. If this is no longer possible, use the configuration data stored in the station. Remove the DPU/RPS STM-1.
The STM-1 signal will also be interrupted with PR operation. In case of XPIC systems, bit errors will occur for up to 5 s in the XPIC partner channel.

3.

Mount the DPU/RPS STM-1.


In case of XPIC systems, bit errors may occur for up to 5 s in the XPIC partner channel.

4. 5. 6.

Download the configuration using the appropriate file. If this file is not available, configure the unit as required. Align the system as described in Chapter 5 of the Operating Instructions. Check the system data and make sure that the nameplate data and software version correspond with the current status.

9-8

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions

What is when? Troubleshooting

9.2.6 OHAU
X109

PS
BAT ROH1 W

RFCOH W

EOW1
CALL

ECC

EOW2
CALL

RFCOH E

SOH ACC

SOH EXT
X65

X108

RW1 OUT X67

ROH1 E X107

X34

EOW1 X37

EOW2 N X36

EOW2 A

X61

SOH1 E

SE2 OUT

X110 X42 X106

+
X75 SOH/WSC E X45 SOH/E2 E

Q CON X71 BAT1 19...75V DC Q LOC

SE1 IN X43

X55

DSC 9...12 E X41 EOW2 INT S

X47 QSC EXT X33 EOW1 A X32 EOW1 EXT S

X46

SOH/E2 W X35 EOW2 EXT S

X105 X74 X101

ROH/WSC W X73

ROH/WSC E

X62

X103 SOH2 E X104

RE1 OUT X60

DSC 1...8 W

SISA 0/N
SERV

X59

DSC 1...8 E X107

X40 EOW1 INT S X51 SOH/E1 E X53 SOH/F1 E RESET X117 RC SISA X31 EOW2 EXT X30 EOW1 EXT

X63

SOH1 W SW2 IN

X56

DSC 9...12 W X54 SOH/F1 W

X102 X111

X81

LON W

X38

QE

X76

SOH/WSC W X52 SOH/E W X115 X114

X112

X82

LON E

X39

QW

X64

SOH2 W X113

RW2 IN X68

ROH2 W

X66

ROH2 E

SW1 OUT

9.2.6.1 OHAU Power Supply


1. Switch off the OHAU by means of the circuit breaker.
All service channels will be interrupted. The system cannot be monitored any more by SOA.

2. 3.

Exchange the OHAU Power Supply. Switch on again the OHAU.

RF/160 OI

9-9

What is when? Troubleshooting

Operating Instructions

9.2.6.2 RFCOH EAST / WEST


1. 2. Save the configuration. If this is no longer possible, use the configuration data stored in the station. Remove the RFCOH module.
The RFCOH service channels are interrupted.

3. 4. 5. 6.

On the new RFCOH module, configure the 2 Mbit/s interfaces. Mount the RFCOH module. Download again the configuration using the appropriate file. If this file is not available, configure the RFCOH module as required. Check the system data and make sure that the nameplate data and software version correspond with the current status.

9.2.6.3 EOW
1. 2. Save the configuration. If this is no longer possible, use the configuration data stored in the station. Remove the EOW module.
EOW service channels are interrupted.

3. 4. 5.

Mount the EOW module. Download again the configuration using the appropriate file. If this file is not available, configure the EOW module as required. Check the system data and make sure that the nameplate data and software version correspond with the current status.

9.2.6.4 QTN
1. 2. Save the configuration. If this is no longer possible, use the configuration data stored in the station. Remove the QTN module.
QTN service channels are interrupted (no more SOA monitoring).

3. 4. 5.

Mount the QTN module. Download again the configuration using the appropriate file. If this file is not available, configure the QTN module as required. Check the system data and make sure that the nameplate data and software version correspond with the current status.

9-10

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions

What is when? Troubleshooting

9.2.6.5 SISA-K/R
1. 2. Save the configuration. If this is no longer possible, use the configuration data stored in the station. Remove the SISA-K/R module.
SOA monitoring is no longer possible.

3. 4. 5.

Configure the SISA bus terminations. Mount the SISA-K/R module. Download again the configuration using the appropriate file. If this file is not available, configure the SISA-K/R module as required.

9.2.6.6 ECC Gateway


1. 2. Save the configuration. If this is no longer possible, use the configuration data stored in the station. Remove the ECC Gateway module.
SOA monitoring is no longer possible.

3. 4. 5.

Mount the ECC Gateway module. Download again the configuration using the appropriate file. If this file is not available, configure the ECC Gateway module as required. Check the system data and make sure that the nameplate data and software version correspond with the current status.

9.2.6.7 SOH Access / SOH Extension


1. 2. Save the configuration. If this is no longer possible, use the configuration data stored in the station. Switch off the SOH Access / SOH Extension module by means of the circuit breaker.
All service channels will be interrupted.

3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.

Remove the SOH Access / SOH Extension module. On the new SOH Access module, configure the 2 Mbit/s interfaces. Mount the SOH Access / SOH Extension module. Switch on again the SOH Access / SOH Extension module by means of the circuit breaker. Download again the configuration using the appropriate file. If this file is not available, configure the SOH Access / SOH Extension module as required. Check the system data and make sure that the nameplate data and software version correspond with the current status. 9-11

RF/160 OI

What is when? Troubleshooting

Operating Instructions

9.2.6.8 SISA-0/N
1. 2. Save the configuration. If this is no longer possible, use the configuration data stored in the station. Remove the SISA-0/N module.
SOA monitoring is no longer possible.

3. 4. 5. 6.

On the new SISA-0/N module, adjust again the old SISA network address. Mount the SISA-0/N module. Download again the configuration using the appropriate file. If this file is not available, configure the SISA-0/N module as required. Check the system data and make sure that the nameplate data and software version correspond with the current status.

9-12

RF/160 OI

9.3

RF/160 OI

RF Unit

Operating Instructions

Alarms

Main receiver LOS Manual operation BAT Fault

Transmitter Tx IF power too low IF input signal ATPC level error Manual operation BAT Fault

Tx/Rx oscillator module Local oscillator Cross-channel osc. Fault

Diversity receiver LOS diversity LOS at combiner input Manual operation Fault

X X X

X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X

Loss of IF input signal at Tx X2 Loss of IF input signal at Rx X23/24 Loss of RF input signal at Rx X2 Loss of RF input signal at Rx X22 Frequency filter frequency Interruption of radio hop Loss of input sync signal at Osc X1 Manual adjustment RF oscillator failure Configuration setting Sweep mode active XPIC Slave mode active Manual Tx power control active Length compensation mode active FF return direction faulty Missing connecting cable Power supply failure Operating voltage failure Internal fault Module defective or faulty

What is when? Troubleshooting

9-13

What is when? Troubleshooting

Operating Instructions

9.4

Modem Unit
No signal from DPU Wrong configuration in HSB mode Configuration setting Master not in XPIC mode XPIC mode active XPIC mode not active Interruption of radio hop FF return direction faulty XPIC mode leads to BE Cross-polar ch. not in sync No XPIC synchronization signal Operating voltage failure Power supply failure Internal error Module defective or faulty

Alarms

SPI STM-1 EL module LOS at input Output signal failure Reference clock Code error at input Fault SPI STM-1 OPT module Tx laser power <70% LOS at input Fault RPSI STM-1 module LOS at input Output signal failure Reference clock Code error at input Fault Modem Unit power supply x.x V BAT Fault Modulator No IF output signal Clock signal out of sync IF carrier out of sync No IF carrier sync General alarm of ASIC Fault

Loss of IF input signal Loss of IF output signal No/wrong signal from DPU No/wrong BB CMI input signal No/wrong optical BB input signal Laser in test mode

X X X X X X X

X X

X X X X

X X X X

X X X X X X X

X X

X X X X X X X X

X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X

X X X X X X X

9-14

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions

What is when? Troubleshooting

Alarms

Demodulator 64QAM Carrier recovery A/D converter output Radio clock monitoring No IF input signal No FEC synchronization Line clock monitoring XPIC operation not possible Elastic buffer overflow Fault Demodulator 128QAM Carrier recovery A/D converter output Radio clock monitoring No IF signal from other Demod Other Demod not synchronized Reset of equalizer MLC Decoder not synchronized FIFO pointer collision in MLC decoder XPIC operation not possible Elastic buffer overflow of XPE Fault

X X X X

X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X

X X X

X X X

X X X X X X X X X X X X

X X X

X X X X X X X X X X X X

X X X X X

RF/160 OI

Configuration setting Master not in XPIC mode XPIC mode active XPIC mode not active Interruption of radio hop FF return direction faulty XPIC mode leads to BE Cross-polar ch. not in sync No XPIC synchronization signal Operating voltage failure Power supply failure Internal error Module defective or faulty

Loss of IF input signal Loss of IF output signal No/wrong signal from DPU Bit error ratio > 1E-02 Interruption of radio hop Wrong clock in input signal Bad input signal quality Loss of input sync signal

X X

X X X

9-15

What is when? Troubleshooting

Operating Instructions

Alarms

DPU STM-1 transmission Manual intervention Line side LOS LOF STM-1 AIS received SES (B1) J0-TIM Radio side AIS received SES (B1) J0-TIM Radio hop identifier LA Tx received Operating channel LOS LOF RFCOH LOF STM-1 Protection channel LOS LOF RFCOH LOF STM-1 Protection switching Faulty CAN ring Tx side

X X X X X X X X X X X

X X

X X X X X X

X X X X X X

LOS (PR from OP) LOF (PR from OP) Number of prot. switchovers exceeded threshold Rx side LOS (OP from PR) LOF (OP from PR) Alignment OP-PR Number of prot. switchovers exceeded threshold Protection switching could not be performed

9-16

Wrong RPS BB-branching Other DPU(s) defective or faulty All PRs already used or locked User threshold is exceeded Operating voltage failure Module defective or faulty

Loopback activated B1 byte inversion activated AIS in BB input signal No/wrong BB input signal Faulty BB interface No/wrong signal from Demod AIS in Rx signal AIS inject. disabled at SES(B1) Wrong path trace received Wrong channel ID received Wrong polarization ID received CAN ring interrupted

XPIC mode active XPIC mode not active Interruption of radio hop

X X X X X X X X X X X

RF/160 OI

DPU

RF/160 OI

Alarms

Operating Instructions

Tx Rx OP OP PR1 PR1 PR2 PR2 SYN Tx SWITCH LOCK LOCK blinks Fault X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
Module defective or faulty

AIS in BB input signal No/wrong BB input signal Faulty BB interface No/wrong signal from Demod AIS in Rx signal Wrong path trace received Wrong channel ID received Wrong polarization ID received

Interruption of radio hop Transmitter display Manual switchover (only RPS) Channel is locked (only RPS) CAN ring interrupted (only RPS) RPS on channel is synchonized RPS is active

What is when? Troubleshooting

9-17

What is when? Troubleshooting

Operating Instructions

9.5

RPS
CAN messages corrupted CAN loop is not closed Short circuit - sec. voltage DSC not switched through Operating voltage failure Module defective or faulty

Alarms

RPS-C module Configuration Power supply CAN bus Fault RPS-H module Power supply CAN communication Fault

X X X X X

X X X X X

9.6

OHA Unit

9.6.1 OHAU power supply

Alarms

OHAU power supply x.x. V BAT Fault

9-18

Short circuit - sec. voltage Operating voltage failure Module defective or faulty

X X X X X X

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions

What is when? Troubleshooting

9.6.2 RFCOH Access Module


Loss of RFCOH input signal No connection to DPU Interruption of radio link AIS in digital input signal Missing Tx-side input signal Wrong configruation setting Module defective or faulty

Alarms

RFCOH Access Module DSC1..4 + WSC OP DSC1...DSC4 WSC RX direction No connection / DPU disc. LOS OOF DSC OOF WSC AIS (in) DSC1...DSC4 AIS (in) WSC TX direction No connection / DPU disc. Multiple write access DSC Multiple write access WSC AIS (in) DSC1...DSC4 AIS (in) WSC DSC1..4 + WSC PR DSC1...DSC4 WSC RX direction No connection / DPU disc. LOS OOF DSC OOF WSC AIS (in) DSC1...DSC4 AIS (in) WSC TX direction No connection / DPU disc. Multiple write access DSC Multiple write access WSC AIS (in) DSC1...DSC4 AIS (in) WSC

X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X

X X

X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X

X X X X X X X

RF/160 OI

9-19

What is when? Troubleshooting

Operating Instructions

Loss of RFCOH input signal No connection to DPU Interruption of radio link AIS in digital input signal Missing Tx-side input signal Wrong configruation setting

Alarms

RFCOH Access Module DSC 5..8 OP DSC5...DSC8 RX direction No connection / DPU disc. LOS OOF DSC AIS (in) DSC5...DSC8 TX direction No connection / DPU disc. Multiple write access DSC AIS (in) DSC5...DSC8 DSC 5..8 PR DSC5...DSC8 RX direction No connection / DPU disc. LOS OOF DSC AIS (in) DSC5...DSC8 TX direction No connection / DPU disc. Multiple write access DSC AIS (in) DSC5...DSC8 Fault

X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X

X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X

X X X X X X X X X X X X

9-20

RF/160 OI

Module defective or faulty

Operating Instructions

What is when? Troubleshooting

9.6.3 SOH Access Module

Loss of SOH input signal No connection to DPU Interruption of radio link AIS in digital input signal Missing Tx-side input signal Wrong configruation setting

Alarms

SOH Access Module West: Operating channel OP DSC1...DSC4 WSC E1 F1 Rx direction No connection / DPU disco. LOS OOF DSC OOF WSC

X X X X

X X X X

X X X X

X X X X

X X X X

X X X X

X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X

AIS (in) DSC1...DSC4 AIS (in) WSC AIS (in) E1 AIS (in) F1

Tx direction No connection / DPU X X X disco. Multiple write access DSC Multiple write access WSC Multiple write access E1 Multiple write access F1 AIS (in) DSC1...DSC4 X AIS (in) WSC X AIS (in) E1 X AIS (in) F1 X

X X X X

RF/160 OI

Module defective or faulty

X X X X

9-21

What is when? Troubleshooting

Operating Instructions

Loss of SOH input signal No connection to DPU Interruption of radio link AIS in digital input signal Missing Tx-side input signal Wrong configuration setting

Alarms

SOH Access Module West: Protection channel PR DSC1...DSC4 WSC E1 F1 Rx direction No connection / DPU disco. LOS OOF DSC OOF WSC

X X X X

X X X X

X X X X

X X X X

X X X X

X X X X

X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X

AIS (in) DSC1...DSC4 AIS (in) WSC AIS (in) E1 AIS (in) F1

Tx direction No connection / DPU X X X disco. Multiple write access DSC Multiple write access WSC Multiple write access E1 Multiple write access F1 AIS (in) DSC1...DSC4 X AIS (in) WSC X AIS (in) E1 X AIS (in) F1 X

X X X X

9-22

RF/160 OI

Module defective or faulty

X X X X

Operating Instructions

What is when? Troubleshooting

Loss of SOH input signal No connection to DPU Interruption of radio link AIS in digital input signal Missing Tx-side input signal Wrong configuration setting

Alarms

SOH Access Module East: Operating channel OP DSC1...DSC4 WSC E1 F1 Rx direction No connection / DPU disconnection LOS OOF DSC OOF WSC

X X X X

X X X X

X X X X

X X X X

X X X X

X X X X

X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X

AIS (in) DSC1...DSC4 AIS (in) WSC AIS (in) E1 AIS (in) F1

Tx direction No connection / DPU X X X disconnection Multiple write access DSC Multiple write access WSC Multiple write access E1 Multiple write access F1 AIS (in) DSC1...DSC4 X AIS (in) WSC X AIS (in) E1 X AIS (in) F1 X

X X X X

RF/160 OI

Module defective or faulty

X X X X

9-23

What is when? Troubleshooting

Operating Instructions

Loss of SOH input signal No connection to DPU Interruption of radio link AIS in digital input signal Missing Tx-side input signal Wrong configuration setting

Alarms

SOH Access Module East: Protection channel PR DSC1...DSC4 WSC E1 F1 Rx direction No connection / DPU disconnect. LOS OOF DSC OOF WSC

X X X X

X X X X

X X X X

X X X X

X X X X

X X X X

X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X

AIS (in) DSC1...DSC4 AIS (in) WSC AIS (in) E1 AIS (in) F1

Tx direction No connection / DPU X X X disco. Multiple write access DSC Multiple write access WSC Multiple write access E1 Multiple write access F1 AIS (in) DSC1...DSC4 X AIS (in) WSC X AIS (in) E1 X AIS (in) F1 X

X X X X

Fault

X X X X X X

9-24

RF/160 OI

Module defective or faulty

X X X X

Operating Instructions

What is when? Troubleshooting

9.6.4 SOH Extension Module

Loss of SOH input signal No connection to DPU Interruption of radio link AIS in digital input signal Missing Tx-side input signal Wrong configruation setting

Alarms

SOH Extension Module West: Operating channel OP DCCM X X X DCCR X X X E2 X X X X Rx direction LOS AIS (in) E2 Tx direction AIS (in) E2 AIS (in) D1 Multiple write access E2

X X X X X

X X X

West: Protection channel PR DCCM X X X DCCR X X X E2 X X X X Rx direction LOS AIS (in) E2 Tx direction AIS (in) E2

X X X X X

X X

Multiple write access E2

RF/160 OI

Module defective or faulty

9-25

What is when? Troubleshooting

Operating Instructions

Loss of SOH input signal No connection to DPU Interruption of radio link AIS in digital input signal Missing Tx-side input signal Wrong configruation setting

Alarms

SOH Extension Module East: Operating channel OP DCCM DCCR E2 Rx direction LOS AIS (in) E2 Tx direction AIS (in) E2

X X X X X X X X X X

X X X X X

X X X X X X X X X X X X X

Multiple write access E2 Multiple write access D1 East: Protection channel PR DCCM DCCR E2
Rx direction LOS AIS (in) E2 Tx direction AIS (in) E2

X X X X X

X X

Multiple write access E2

Fault

X X X X X X

9-26

RF/160 OI

Module defective or faulty

Operating Instructions

What is when? Troubleshooting

9.6.5 SISA0/N
LMT connected to port F Nominal/Actual equipment Internal error Operating voltage failure Module defective or faulty

Alarms

SISA-0/N module Module defective Hardware defective Inconsistent configuration Faulty software No free memory capacity Program memory not readable Data memory not readable Service Fault

X X X X X X X X X X

RF/160 OI

9-27

QTN module Interface A LOS AIS Interface B LOS AIS

EOW module West East North CALL Fault

9.6.6 EOW and QTN

What is when? Troubleshooting

9-28 SISA K SISA K INT EXT DSC ID

Alarms

X X X X

X X X X X X X X X

Loss of signal from West AIS received from West Loss of signal from East AIS received from East Loss of signal from North Received AIS from North Phone call indication

X X X X X X X

X X X X X X

Loss of signal at interf. A AIS received at interf. A Loss of signal at interf. B AIS received at interf. B SISA/K alarm SISA/K service indication

Operating Instructions

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions

Subracks and Modules

10 Subracks and Modules


10.1 Transmitter (Tx)
RF X1

MU CONT X4

OPT X5

BAT

BAT X3 IF X2 SYN

X1

X2

Fig. 10-1:

Transmitter (Tx)

RF/160 OI

10-1

Subracks and Modules

Operating Instructions

10.2 Main and diversity receiver (Rx / RxD)

IF COMB X25

BAT

X3

MU CONTR IF COMB X24 IF X22 IF COMB X23 IF X2 X4

BAT

REC X5

RF X21

RF X1

X1

SYN

X2

Fig. 10-2:

Main and diversity receiver (Rx/RxD)

10-2

RF/160 OI

RF/160 OI
OP3/10 X13 TRANSIT OP4/11 S1 X14 OP5/12 X15 X1 X2 X16 X17 X18 LON W LON E END CAN E X6 OP6/13 OP7/14 OP8 CAN W CAN E X4 PR1/2 X5 X29 OP4/11 X12 X11 X19 X10 CAN W OP2/9 OP1 PR1/2 X3 X20 OP1 X21 OP2/9 X22 OP3/10 X23

10.3 RPS-C

Operating Instructions

Fig. 10-3:
TX SIDE RX SIDE
OP8 X28 OP7/14 X27 OP6/13 X26 OP5/12 X25 X24

RPS-C

Subracks and Modules

10-3

10.4 RPS-H

Subracks and Modules

10-4
MODEM UNIT (TX2) CAN E X84 MODEM UNIT X852 X12 X872 X881 X882 MODEM UNIT (RX2) MODEM UNIT (RX1) X11 RX2 (MU CONTR) RX DIV SWITCH RX SWITCH MODEM UNIT (TX1) X862 TX2 (MU CONTR) X13 TX SWITCH

Fig. 10-4: Operating Instructions

RPS-H

X861

X851

X871

RF/160 OI

RF/160 OI
X75 LON E X76 LON W PR2/1 X95 X99 X55 ROH 1B IF2 X83 X87 RX1 X61 ROH 2B CAN W X63 ROH A TX1 X88 X77 MST-ADR IF2 X78 RC X85 RX2

X73

IF1

X82

2U

X74

10.5 Modem Unit

Operating Instructions

IF1 PR1/1 BFI-ESG X84 + X72 BAT2 19...75V DC PR2/2 X86 X59 + SOH 1A X70 DCCR X57 SOH 2A X53 CAN E TX2 SOH 2B SOH 1B X96 X100

X81

X92 X90

X91 X89

X79

PR1/2

X71 BAT1 19...75V DC X51

RPSI CTRL
BAT TX OP PR1 PR2 SYN TX SYN TX SWITCH LOCK SWITCH LOCK OP PR1 PR2 RX TX RX

PS

MD DM

DPU RPS DM MD PS

DPU RPS

RPSI

BAT

Fig. 10-5:
MAN MAN

MU subrack

6U
SPI

SPI

X2

STM-1 1
X3

2
X1

STM-1

Subracks and Modules

10-5

Subracks and Modules

10.6 OHAU subrack

10.6.1 OHAU subrack (depicted with QD2 interface module)

10-6
PS
X108 BAT ID X65 INT EXT DSC X61 RESET X75 SOH/WSC E X45 SOH/E2 E SOH1 E SISA K CALL CALL ROH1 E X107

Fig. 10-6:
RFCOH W

X109

EOW1

EOW2

RFCOH E

SOH ACC

SOH EXT

RW1 OUT X67

ROH1 W

X34

EOW1 X37

EOW2 N X36

EOW2 A

SE2 OUT

X110 X106 X42

Q CON X71 BAT1 19...75V DC X55

SE1 IN X43

Q LOC

DSC 9...12 E X41 EOW2 INT S

X47 QSC EXT X33 EOW1 A X32 EOW1 EXT S

X46

SOH/E2 W X35 EOW2 EXT S

X105 X101

X74

ROH/WSC W X73

ROH/WSC E

X62

X103 SOH2 E X104

6U
X59 SERV X63 RESET X56 DSC 9...12 W X54 SOH/F1 W SOH1 W SW2 IN DSC 1...8 E X107

RE1 OUT X60

DSC 1...8 W

SISA 0/N

X40 EOW1 INT S X51 SOH/E1 E X53 SOH/F1 E

X117 RC SISA X31 EOW2 EXT X30 EOW1 EXT

X102 X111

X81

LON W X38

QE

X76

SOH/WSC W X52 SOH/E W X115 X114

X112

X82

LON E

X39

QW

X64

SOH2 W X113

OHAU subrack (depicted with QD2 interface module)


X66 ROH2 E

Operating Instructions

RW2 IN X68

ROH2 W

SW1 OUT

RF/160 OI

RF/160 OI
PS
X108 BAT X65 ROH1 E X107 CALL CALL

Operating Instructions

X109

RFCOH W

EOW1

ECC

EOW2

RFCOH E

SOH ACC SOH EXT

10.6.2 OHAU subrack (depicted with ECC Gateway module)

Fig. 10-7:
X61 SOH1 E SE2 OUT X75 SOH/WSC E X45 SOH/E2 E X55 DSC 9...12 E X41 EOW2 INT S X46 SOH/E2 W X35 EOW2 EXT S X62 X103 SOH2 E X104

RW1 OUT X67

ROH1 W

X34

EOW1 X37

EOW2 N X36

EOW2 A

X110 X42 X106

Q CON X71 BAT1 19...75V DC

SE1 IN X43

Q LOC

X47 QSC EXT X33 EOW1 A X32 EOW1 EXT S

X105 X101

X74

ROH/WSC W X73

ROH/WSC E

6U
X59 DSC 1...8 E X107

RE1 OUT X60

DSC 1...8 W

SISA 0/N
SERV

X40 EOW1 INT S X51 SOH/E1 E X53 SOH/F1 E RESET

X63

SOH1 W SW2 IN

X117 RC SISA X31 EOW2 EXT X30 EOW1 EXT

X56

DSC 9...12 W X54 SOH/F1 W

X102 X111

X81

LON W X38

QE

X76

SOH/WSC W X52 SOH/E W X115 X114

X112

X82

LON E

X39

QW

X64

SOH2 W X113

OHAU subrack (depicted with ECC Gateway module)


X66

RW2 IN X68

ROH2 W

ROH2 E

SW1 OUT

Subracks and Modules

10-7

Subracks and Modules

Operating Instructions

This page has been left blank for editorial reasons.

10-8

RF/160 OI

RF/160 OI
3853.5 MHz 3824.5 MHz 3882.5 MHz 3940.5 MHz 4037.5 MHz 4095.5 MHz 3911.5 MHz 3969.5 MHz 4003.5 MHz 4066.5 MHz 4124.5 MHz 4153.5 MHz 4182.5 MHz 3803.5 MHz 4203.5 MHz 29 MHz 68 MHz 213 MHz

Operating Instructions

11 Channel Patterns

11.1 Channel patterns of the 4 GHz RF band

Fig. 11-1:

ITU-R F.382

Channel Patterns

11-1

Channel Patterns

11-2
3442.0 MHz 3413.0 MHz 3471.0 MHz 3529.0 MHz 3626.0 MHz 3684.0 MHz 3742.0 MHz 3500.0 MHz 3558.0 MHz 3592.0 MHz 3655.0 MHz 3713.0 MHz 3771.0 MHz 3392 MHz 3792 MHz 29 MHz

Fig. 11-2:
68 MHz 213 MHz 3853.5 MHz 3824.5 MHz 3882.5 MHz 3940.5 MHz 3911.5 MHz 3969.5 MHz 4003.5 MHz 4037.5 MHz 4066.5 MHz

4124.5 MHz 4095.5 MHz 4153.5 MHz

ITU-R F.382 China


3803.5 MHz 29 MHz 68 MHz 213 MHz

4182.5 MHz

4203.5 MHz

Operating Instructions

RF/160 OI

RF/160 OI
3737.5 MHz 3766.5 MHz 3824.5 MHz 3882.5 MHz 3940.5 MHz 4037.5 MHz 3795.5 MHz 3853.5 MHz 3911.5 MHz 3969.5 MHz 4003.5 MHz 4066.5 MHz 4095.5 MHz 4124.5 MHz 4153.5 MHz 4182.5 MHz 4200 MHz 29 MHz 68 MHz 213 MHz

Operating Instructions

3611.5 MHz

3669.5 MHz

Fig. 11-3:

3640.5 MHz

ITU-R F.382 (OIRT)

Channel Patterns

11-3

Channel Patterns

11-4
3450.5 MHz 3422.5 MHz 3478.5 MHz 3534.5 MHz 3590.5 MHz 3688.5 MHz 3506.5 MHz 3562.5 MHz 3618.5 MHz 3653.5 MHz 3716.5 MHz 3744.5 MHz 3772.5 MHz 3800.5 MHz 3828.5 MHz 3856.5 MHz 3884.5 MHz 28 MHz 70 MHz 266 MHz

Fig. 11-4:

ITU-R F.497 sim. Russia

Operating Instructions

RF/160 OI

RF/160 OI
3620.0 MHz 3940.0 MHz 4020.0 MHz 4100 MHz 3700.0 MHz 3780.0 MHz 3860.0 MHz 3900.0 MHz 4180.0 MHz 3600 MHz 4200.0 MHz 3660.0 MHz 40 MHz 320 MHz 3740.0 MHz 3820.0 MHz 80 MHz 3980.0 MHz 4060.0 MHz 4140.0 MHz 3610.0 MHz 3690.0 MHz 3770.0 MHz 3850.0 MHz 3900.0 MHz 3930.0 MHz 4010.0 MHz 4090 MHz 4170.0 MHz 3600 MHz 4200.0 MHz 3650.0 MHz 3730.0 MHz 3810.0 MHz 40 MHz 320 MHz 80 MHz 3970.0 MHz 4050.0 MHz 4130.0 MHz

Operating Instructions

Fig. 11-5:

ITU-R F.635 A1

Channel Patterns

11-5

Channel Patterns

11-6
3630.0 MHz 3710.0 MHz 3790.0 MHz 3870.0 MHz 3950.0 MHz 4030.0 MHz 4110.0 MHz 4190.0 MHz 4200 MHz 80 MHz 320 MHz

Fig. 11-6:

3580 MHz

ITU-R F.635 A1 5a sim.

Operating Instructions

RF/160 OI

RF/160 OI
4430.0 MHz 4470.0 MHz 4730.0 MHz 4810.0 MHz 4550.0 MHz 4630.0 MHz 4510.0 MHz 4590.0 MHz 4670.0 MHz 4700.0 MHz 4770.0 MHz 4850.0 MHz 4890.0 MHz 4930.0 MHz 4970.0 MHz 4400 MHz 5000 MHz 80 MHz 60 MHz 300 MHz

Operating Instructions

11.2 Channel patterns of the 5 GHz RF band

Fig. 11-7:

ITU-R F.1099 A1

Channel Patterns

11-7

Channel Patterns

11-8
Fig. 11-8:
4450.0 MHz 4530.0 MHz 4610.0 MHz 4690.0 MHz 4700.0 MHz 4750.0 MHz 4830.0 MHz 4400 MHz 80 MHz 60 MHz 4910.0 MHz 4990.0 MHz 5000 MHz

ITU-R F.1099 A1 3 sim.


300 MHz

Operating Instructions

RF/160 OI

RF/160 OI
5717.0 MHz 5745.0 MHz 5801.0 MHz 5857.0 MHz 5955.0 MHz 6011.0 MHz 6067.0 MHz 5773.0 MHz 5829.0 MHz 5885.0 MHz 5920.0 MHz 5983.0 MHz 6039.0 MHz

Operating Instructions

6095.0 MHz
6123.0 MHz

6151.0 MHz

5689.0 MHz

11.3 Channel patterns of the L6 RF band

Fig. 11-9:
28 MHz 70 MHz 266 MHz

5670 MHz

6170 MHz

ITU-R F.497 Russia

Channel Patterns

11-9

Channel Patterns

11-10
5974.85 MHz 5945.20 MHz 6004.50 MHz 6063.80 MHz 6123.10 MHz 6197.24 MHz 6256.89 MHz 6034.15 MHz 6093.45 MHz 6152.75 MHz 6175.0 MHz 6226.89 MHz 6286.19 MHz 6315.84 MHz 6345.49 MHz 6375.14 MHz 6404.79 MHz 6425 MHz 29.65 MHz 44.49 MHz 252.04 MHz

Fig. 11-10:

5925 MHz

ITU-R F.383

Operating Instructions

RF/160 OI

RF/160 OI
6500.0 MHz 6540.0 MHz 6620.0 MHz 6700.0 MHz 6800.0 MHz 6880.0 MHz 6580.0 MHz 6660.0 MHz 6740.0 MHz 6770.0 MHz 6840.0 MHz 6920.0 MHz 6960.0 MHz

Operating Instructions

7000.0 MHz
7040.0 MHz

7080.0 MHz

6460.0 MHz

11.4 Channel patters of the U6 RF band

Fig. 11-11:
40 MHz 60 MHz 340 MHz

6430 MHz

7110 MHz

ITU-R F.384

Channel Patterns

11-11

Channel Patterns

11.5 Channel patterns of the 7 GHz RF band

11-12
7442.0 MHz 7470.0 MHz 7526.0 MHz 7596.0 MHz 7652.0 MHz 7708.0 MHz 7498.0 MHz 7554.0 MHz 7575.0 MHz 7624.0 MHz 7680.0 MHz 7425 MHz 7725 MHz 28 MHz 42 MHz

Fig. 11-12:
154 MHz 7428.0 MHz 7456.0 MHz 7512.0 MHz 7484.0 MHz 7540.0 MHz 7575.0 MHz 7610.0 MHz 7638.0 MHz

7694.0 MHz 7666.0 MHz 7722.0 MHz

ITU-R F. 385 A1 + alt.


7425 MHz 28 MHz 70 MHz 182 MHz

7725 MHz

Operating Instructions

RF/160 OI

RF/160 OI
7275.0 MHz 7345.0 MHz 7317.0 MHz 7373.0 MHz 7429.0 MHz 7485.0 MHz 7541.0 MHz 7401.0 MHz 7457.0 MHz 7513.0 MHz 7569.0 MHz 7597.0 MHz 7625.0 MHz 7653.0 MHz 7681.0 MHz 7709.0 MHz 7737.0 MHz 7750.0 MHz 28 MHz 56 MHz 168 MHz

Operating Instructions

7121.0 MHz

7177.0 MHz

7233.0 MHz

7149.0 MHz

7205. MHz

Fig. 11-13:

7110.0 MHz

28 MHz

84 MHz

ITU-R F.385 A3

196 MHz

Channel Patterns

11-13

Channel Patterns

11-14
7470.0 MHz 7498.0 MHz 7554.0 MHz 7610.0 MHz 7687.0 MHz 7743.0 MHz 7526.0 MHz 7582.0 MHz 7638.0 MHz 7662.5 MHz 7715.0 MHz 7771.0 MHz 7799.0 MHz 7827.0 MHz 7855.0 MHz 7883.0 MHz 7900.0 MHz 28 MHz 49 MHz 245 MHz

7442.0 MHz

Fig. 11-14:

7425.0 MHz

ITU-R F.385 A4

Operating Instructions

RF/160 OI

RF/160 OI
7777.35 MHz 7807.00 MHz 7866.30 MHz 7925.60 MHz 8059.02 MHz 8118.32 MHz 7836.65 MHz 7895.95 MHz 7955.25 MHz 8000.0 MHz 8088.67 MHz 8147.97 MHz 8177.62 MHz 8207.27 MHz 8236.92 MHz 8266.57 MHz 8275.0 MHz 29.65 MHz 103.77 MHz 331.32 MHz

Operating Instructions

7747.70 MHz

11.6 Channel patterns of the 8 GHz RF band

Fig. 11-15:

7725.0 MHz

ITU-R F.386 A1

Channel Patterns

11-15

Channel Patterns

11-16
8293.0 MHz 8321.0 MHz 8349.0 MHz 8387.5 MHz 8412.0 MHz 8440.0 MHz 8468.0 MHz

Fig. 11-16:
8275.0 MHz 28 MHz 63 MHz

8500.0 MHz

ITU-R F.386 A3 sim.

119 MHz

Operating Instructions

RF/160 OI

RF/160 OI
7954 MHz 7926 MHz 7982 MHz 8038 MHz 8094 MHz 8192 MHz 8248 MHz 8010 MHz 8066 MHz 8122 MHz 8157 MHz 8220 MHz 8276 MHz 8304 MHz 8332 MHz 8360 MHz 8388 MHz 8400 MHz 28 MHz 70 MHz 266 MHz

Operating Instructions

Fig. 11-17:

7900 MHz

ITU-R F.386 A4

Channel Patterns

11-17

Channel Patterns

11.7 Channel patterns of the 13 GHz RF band

11-18
12849.0 MHz 12821.0 MHz 12877.0 MHz 12933.0 MHz 13031.0 MHz 13087.0 MHz 12905.0 MHz 12961.0 MHz 12996.0 MHz 13059.0 MHz 13115.0 MHz 13143.0 MHz 13171.0 MHz 13199.0 MHz 13227.0 MHz 13250.0 MHz 28 MHz 70 MHz 266 MHz

12793.0 MHz

Fig. 11-18:

12765.0 MHz

12750.0 MHz

ITU-R F.497

Operating Instructions

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions

Frequency Setting

12 Frequency Setting
12.1 Frequency setting in the 3.6 GHz RF band
3.6 GHz frequency band (ITU-R Rec. F.497 Annex 1) 28 MHz

Lower subband Subband no. Channels Channel frequencies [MHz] Oscillator frequencies [MHz] Overlaying * Underlaying *
X X 1 1a, 2a 3422.5 3450.5 3562.5 3590.5 2 3a, 4a 3478.5 3506.5 3618.5 3646.5 3 5a, 6a 3534.5 3562.5 3394.5 3422.5 X 4 7a, 8a 3590.5 3618.5 3450.5 3478.5 X X 1 1b, 2b 3688.5 3716.5 3828.5 3856.5

Upper subband
2 3b, 4b 3744.5 3772.5 3884.5 3912.5 3 5b, 6b 3800.5 3828.5 3660.5 3688.5 X X 4 7b, 8b 3856.5 3884.5 3716.5 3744.5 X

* see section 4.2, page 4-6

3.6 GHz frequency band (ITU-R Rec. F.382 China) 29 MHz

Lower subband Subband no. Channels Channel frequencies [MHz] Oscillator frequencies [MHz] Overlaying * Underlaying *
X X 1 1a 3413 3553 2 2a, 3a 3442 3471 3582 3611 3 4a, 5a 3500 3529 3360 3389 X 4 6a 3558 3418 X X 1 1b 3626 3766

Upper subband
2 2b, 3b 3655 3684 3795 3824 3 4b, 5b 3713 3742 3573 3602 X X 4 6b 3771 3631 X

* see section 4.2, page 4-6

RF/160 OI

12-1

Frequency Setting

Operating Instructions

12.2 Frequency setting in the 3.9 GHz RF band


3.9 GHz frequency band (ITU-R Rec. F.635 Annex 1) 40MHz

Lower subband Subband no. Channels Channel frequencies [MHz] Oscillator frequencies [MHz] Overlaying * Underlaying *
X X 1 1a, 2a 3620 3660 3760 3800 2 3a, 4a 3700 3740 3840 3880 3 5a, 6a 3780 3820 3640 3680 X 4 7a 3860 3720 X X 1 1b 3940 4080

Upper subband
2 2b, 3b 3980 4020 4120 4160 3 4b, 5b 4060 4100 3920 3960 X X 4 6b, 7b 4140 4180 4000 4040 X

* see section 4.2, page 4-6

3.9 GHz frequency band (ITU-R Rec. F.635 Annex 1 with 10 MHz offset) 40MHz

Lower subband Subband no. Ch. acc. to ITU-R F.635 A1 Channel frequencies [MHz] Oscillator frequencies [MHz] Overlaying * Underlaying *
X X 1 1a, 2a 3610 3650 3750 3790 2 3a, 4a 3690 3730 3830 3870 3 5a, 6a 3770 3810 3630 3670 X 4 7a 3850 3710 X X 1 1b 3930 4070

Upper subband
2 2b, 3b 3970 4010 4110 4150 3 4b, 5b 4050 4090 3910 3950 X X 4 6b, 7b 4130 4170 3990 4030 X

* see section 4.2, page 4-6

3.9 GHz frequency band (ITU-R Rec. F.635 Annex 1, chapter 5a) 80MHz

Lower subband Subband no. Channels Channel frequencies [MHz] Oscillator frequencies [MHz] Overlaying * Underlaying *
X X 1 1a 3630 3770 2 3a 3710 3850 3 5a 3790 3650 X 4 7a 3870 3730 X X 1 1b 3950 4090

Upper subband
2 3b 4030 4170 3 5b 4110 3970 X X 4 7b 4190 4050 X

* see section 4.2, page 4-6

12-2

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions

Frequency Setting

3.9 GHz frequency band (ITU-R Rec. F.382) 29 MHz

Lower subband Subband no. Channels Channel frequencies [MHz] Oscillator frequency [MHz] Overlaying * Underlaying *
X X 1 7a, 8a, 9a 3737.5 3766.5 3795.5 3877.5 3906.5 3935.5 2 1a, 2a, 3a 3824.5 3853.5 3882.5 3964.5 3993.5 4022.5 3 7b, 8b, 9b 3611.5 3640.5 3669.5 3471.5 3500.5 3529.5 X 4 4a, 5a, 6a 3911.5 3940.5 3969.5 3771.5 3800.5 3829.5 X X 1 1b 4037.5

Upper subband
2 2b, 3b 4066.5 4095.5 4206.5 4235.5 3 4b, 5b 4124.5 4153.5 3984.5 4013.5 X X 4 6b 4182.5

4177.5

4042.5

* see section 4.2, page 4-6

3.9 GHz frequency band (ITU-R Rec. F.635, chapter 6) 30 MHz

Lower subband Subband no. Channels Channel frequencies [MHz]


1 1a, 2a, 3a 3620 3650 3680 2 4a, 5a 3710 3740 3 6a, 7a 3770 3800 4 8a, 9a 3830 3860 1 1b, 2b 3940 3970

Upper subband
2 3b, 4b 4000 4030 3 5b, 6b 4060 4090 4 7b, 8b, 9b 4120 4150 4180

Oscillator frequency [MHz]

3760 3790 3820

3850 3880

3630 3660

3690 3720

4080 4110

4140 4170

3920 3950

3980 4010 4040

Overlaying * Underlaying *
X X

X X X

* see section 4.2, page 4-6

RF/160 OI

12-3

Frequency Setting

Operating Instructions

12.3 Frequency setting in the 4.7 GHz RF band


4.7 GHz frequency band (ITU-R Rec. F.1099) 40 MHz

Lower subband Subband no. Channels Channel frequencies [MHz] Oscillator frequencies [MHz] Overlaying * Underlaying *
X X 1 1a, 2a 4430 4470 4570 4610 2 3a, 4a 4510 4550 4650 4690 3 5a, 6a 4590 4630 4450 4490 X 4 7a 4670 4530 X X 1 1b 4730 4870

Upper subband
2 2b, 3b 4770 4810 4910 4950 3 4b, 5b 4850 4890 4710 4750 X X 4 6b, 7b 4930 4970 4790 4830 X

* see section 4.2, page 4-6

4.7 GHz frequency band (ITU-R Rec. F.1099 Annex 1, chapter 3) 80 MHz

Lower subband Subband no. Sideband no. Channels Channel frequencies [MHz] Oscillator frequencies [MHz] Overlaying * Underlaying *
X X 1 0 1a 4450 4590 2 1 3a 4530 4670 3 2 5a 4610 4470 X 4 3 7a 4690 4550 X X 1 4 1b 4750 4890

Upper subband
2 5 3b 4830 4970 3 6 5b 4910 4770 X X 4 7 7b 4990 4850 X

* see section 4.2, page 4-6

12-4

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions

Frequency Setting

12.4 Frequency setting in the 6.2 GHz RF band


6.2 GHz frequency band (ITU-R Rec. F.383) 29.65 MHz

Lower subband Subband no. Channels Channel frequencies [MHz] Oscillator frequencies [MHz] Overlaying * Underlaying *
X X 1 1a, 2a 5945.20 5974.85 6085.20 6114.85 2 3a, 4a 6004.50 6034.15 6144.50 6174.15 3 5a, 6a 6063.80 6093.45 5923.80 5953.45 X 4 7a, 8a 6123.10 6152.75 5983.10 6012.75 X X 1 1b, 2b 6197.24 6226.89 6337.24 6366.89

Upper subband
2 3b, 4b 6256.54 6286.19 6396.54 6426.19 3 5b, 6b 6315.84 6345.49 6175.84 6205.49 X X 4 7b, 8b 6375.14 6404.79 6235.14 6264.79 X

* see section 4.2, page 4-6

6.2 GHz frequency band (ITU-R Rec. F.497 Russia) 28 MHz

Lower subband Subband no. Channels Channel frequencies [MHz] Oscillator frequencies [MHz] Overlaying * Underlaying *
X X 1 1a / 2a 5689 5717 5829 5857 2 3a / 4a 5745 5773 5885 5913 3 5a / 6a 5801 5829 5661 5689 X 4 7a / 8a 5857 5884 5717 5745 X X 1 1b / 2b 5955 5983 6095 6123

Upper subband
2 3b / 4b 6011 6039 6151 6179 3 5b / 6b 6067 6095 5927 5955 X X 4 7b / 8b 6123 6151 5983 6011 X

* see section 4.2, page 4-6

RF/160 OI

12-5

Frequency Setting

Operating Instructions

12.5 Frequency setting in the 6.8 GHz RF band


6.8 GHz frequency band (ITU-R Rec. F.384) 40 MHz

Lower subband Subband no. Channels Channel frequencies [MHz] Oscillator frequencies [MHz] Overlaying * Underlaying *
X X 1 1a, 2a 6460 6500 6600 6640 2 3a, 4a 6540 6580 6680 6720 3 5a, 6a 6620 6660 6480 6520 X 4 7a, 8a 6700 6740 6560 6600 X X 1 1b, 2b 6800 6840 6940 6980

Upper subband
2 3b, 4b 6880 6920 7020 7060 3 5b, 6b 6960 7000 6820 6860 X X 4 7b, 8b 7040 7080 6900 6940 X

* see section 4.2, page 4-6

12-6

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions

Frequency Setting

12.6 Frequency setting in the 7 GHz RF band


7.5 GHz frequency band (ITU-R Rec. F.385 Annex 1) 28 MHz

Lower subband Subband no. Channels Channel frequencies [MHz] Oscillator frequencies [MHz] Overlaying * Underlaying *
1 1a 7442 7302 X 2 2a 7470 7330 X 3 3a, 4a 7498 7526 7358 7386 X 4 5a 7554 7414 X X 1 1b, 2b 7596 7624 7736 7764

Upper subband
2 3b 7652 7792 3 4b 7680 7820 4 5b 7708 7848

* see section 4.2, page 4-6

7.5 GHz frequency band (ITU-R Rec. F.385 Annex 1 alternatively) 28 MHz

Lower subband Subband no. Channels Channel frequencies [MHz] Oscillator frequencies [MHz] Overlaying * Underlaying *
1 1a, 2a 7428 7456 7288 7316 X 2 3a 7484 7344 X 3 4a 7512 7372 X 4 5a 7540 7400 X X 1 1b 7610 7750

Upper subband
2 2b, 3b 7638 7666 7778 7806 3 4b 7694 7834 4 5b 7722 7862

* see section 4.2, page 4-6

7.5 GHz frequency band (ITU-R Rec. F.385 Annex 4) 28 MHz

Lower subband Subband no. Channels Channel frequencies [MHz] Oscillator frequencies [MHz] Overlaying * Underlaying *
X X 1 1a, 2a 7442 7470 7582 7610 2 3a 7498 3 4a, 5a, 6a 7526 7554 7582 7386 7414 7442 X 4 7a, 8a 7610 7638 7470 7498 X X 1 1b, 2b 7687 7715 7827 7855

Upper subband
2 3b, 4b, 5b 7743 7771 7799 7883 7911 7939 3 6b 7827 4 7b, 8b 7855 7883 7715 7743 X

7638

7687

X X

* see section 4.2, page 4-6

RF/160 OI

12-7

Frequency Setting

Operating Instructions

12.7 Frequency setting in the 8 GHz RF band


8.0 GHz frequency band (ITU-R Rec. F.386 Annex 1) 29.65 MHz

Lower subband Subband no. Channels Channel frequencies


[MHz] 1 1a, 2a 7747.70 7777.35 7887.70 7917.35 2 3a, 4a 7807.00 7836.65 7947.00 7976.65 3 5a, 6a 7866.30 7895.95 7726.30 7755.95 X X X 4 7a, 8a 7925.60 7955.25 7785.60 7815.25 X X 1 1b, 2b 8059.02 8088.67 8199.02 8228.67

Upper subband
2 3b, 4b 8118.32 8147.97 8258.32 8287.97 3 5b, 6b 8177.62 8207.27 8037.62 8067.27 X X 4 7b, 8b 8236.92 8266.57 8096.92 8126.57 X

Oscillator frequencies
[MHz]

Overlaying * Underlaying *

* see section 4.2, page 4-6

8.0 GHz frequency band (ITU-R Rec. F.386 Annex 3) 29.65 MHz

Lower subband Subband no. Channels Channel frequencies


[MHz] 1 1a 8293 8153 X 2 2a 8321 8181 X 3 3a 8349 8209 X X X 4 1 1b 8412 8552

Upper subband
2 2b 8440 8580 3 3b 8468 8608 4

Oscillator frequencies
[MHz]

Overlaying * Underlaying *

* see section 4.2, page 4-6

8.0 GHz frequency band (ITU-R Rec. F.386 Annex 4) 28 MHz

Lower subband Subband no. Channels acc. to ITU R F.386 A4 Channel frequencies
[MHz] 1 1a, 2a 2 3a, 4a 3 5a, 6a 4 7a, 8a 1 1b, 2b

Upper subband
2 3b, 4b 3 5b, 6b 4 7b, 8b

7926 7954 8066 8094

7982 8010 8122 8150

8038 8066 7898 7926 X

8094 8122 7954 7982 X

8192 8220 8332 8360

8248 8276 8388 8416

8304 8332 8164 8192 X

8360 8388 8220 8248 X

Oscillator frequencies
[MHz]

Overlaying * Underlaying *
X X

* see section 4.2, page 4-6

12-8

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions

Frequency Setting

12.8 Frequency setting in the 13 GHz RF band


13 GHz frequency band (ITU-R Rec. F.497) 28 MHz

Lower subband Subband no. Channels Channel frequencies


[MHz] 1 1a, 2a 12765 12793 12905 12933 2 3a, 4a 12821 12849 12961 12989 3 5a, 6a 12877 12905 12737 12765 X X X 4 7a, 8a 12933 12961 12793 12821 X X 1 1b, 2b 13031 13059 13171 13199

Upper subband
2 3b, 4b 13087 13115 13227 13255 3 5b, 6b 13143 13171 13003 13031 X X 4 7b, 8b 13199 13227 13059 13087 X

Oscillator frequency [MHz] Overlaying * Underlaying *

* see section 4.2, page 4-6

RF/160 OI

12-9

Frequency Setting

Operating Instructions

This page has been left blank for editorial reasons.

12-10

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions

Connectors

13 Connectors
The following connectors are made available by the system:

SMA

1.6/5.6

Sub-D 9-pin

Sub-D 15-pin

Sub-D 25-pin

Sub-D 37-pin

Sub-D 3-pin

Optical connectors for monomode fibers: Euro 2000 DIN 47256 SCPC Waveguide connectors PDR... in compliance with IEC-154.

RF/160 OI

13-1

Connectors

Operating Instructions

13.1 Connectors of the transmitter (Tx)


Tx X1 SMA f Pin Signal 1 RF RF

In/Out

Level

RF RF output, main antenna

Tx X2 1.6/5.6 f Pin Signal 1 IF IF

In/Out

Level -10 dBm

IF IF input from MD

Tx X3 Sub-D 3p m Pin Signal 1 2 BAT 3 BAT + BAT Level 19...75 V DC Floating

In/Out

Supply voltage

Tx X5 Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Sub-D 9p m Signal LFT_EA_C LFT_ST_A Ground Ground LFT_ES_A Ground LFT_STSP_C

OPT

In/Out

Level

Rack fan Connector for optional rack fan

13-2

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions

Connectors

Tx oscillator X1 1.6/5.6 f Pin Signal 1 LO SYN

In/Out

Level

DRVCO synchronization Synchronization frequency

Tx oscillator X2 1.6/5.6 f Pin Signal 1 LO SYN

In/Out

Level

DRVCO synchronization Synchronization frequency

RF/160 OI

13-3

Connectors

Operating Instructions

13.2 Connectors of the main and diversity receiver (Rx and RxD)
Rx X1 SMA f Pin Signal 1 RF Rx X2 1.6/5.6 f Pin Signal 1 IF Rx X3 Sub-D 3p m Pin Signal 1 2 BAT 3 BAT + Rx X5 Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 BAT Level 19...75 V DC Floating IF RF

In/Out

Level

RF RF input - main antenna

In/Out

Level -10dBm

IF IF output to the DM or IF combiner

In/Out

Supply voltage

Key word 13-1:

Rx/RxD recorder port

Sub-D 15p m Signal Ground AGC Main AGC Div. Tx level - station B ATPC status FFI residual error ratio Ground sinj cosj AGC-out combiner Combiner distortion Lock DM BB DM distortion -

REC

In/Out

Level 0..5 V 0..5 V

Recorder port Rx level - main antenna Rx level - diversity antenna

0..5 V Tx level of the far end (not with HSB) 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 V ATPC status CMOS Residual error pulses 0...5 V 0...5 V 1...3 V CMOS Distortion of combiner Demodulator locking status Distortion of BB demodulator

13-4

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions

Connectors

Rx oscillator X1 1.6/5.6 f Pin Signal 1 LO Rx oscillator X2 1.6/5.6 f Pin Signal 1 LO SYN SYN

In/Out

Level

DRVCO synchronization Synchronization frequency

In/Out

Level

DRVCO synchronization Synchronization frequency

RF/160 OI

13-5

Connectors

Operating Instructions

RxD X21 SMA f Pin Signal 1 RF RF

In/Out

Level

RF RF input - diversity antenna

RxD X22 1.6/5.6 f Pin Signal 1 IF IF

In/Out

Level -10dBm

IF IF from diversity receiver

RxD X23 1.6/5.6 f Pin Signal 1 IF IF-COMB

In/Out

Level -10dBm

IF IF combiner input #1

RxD X24 1.6/5.6 f Pin Signal 1 IF IF-COMB

In/Out

Level -10dBm

IF IF combiner input #2

RxD X25 1.6/5.6 f Pin Signal 1 IF IF-COMB

In/Out

Level -10dBm

IF IF combiner output to DM

13-6

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions

Connectors

13.3 Connectors of the Modem Unit


Modem Unit X70 Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25

Sub-D 37p m Signal Ground CL B Line OP D B Line OP CL B Line OP D B Line OP CL B Radio OP D B Radio OP CL B Radio OP D B Radio OP CL B Line PR D B Line PR CL B Line PR D B Line PR CL B Radio PR D B Radio PR CL B Radio PR D B Radio PR Ground Ground Ground CL A Line OP D A Line OP CL A Line OP D A Line OP CL A Radio OP

DCCR

In/Out

Level V.11 positive

Service channels D1...D3 192 kbit/s in the SOH

negative

RF/160 OI

13-7

Connectors

Operating Instructions

Modem Unit X70 Pin 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37

Sub-D 37p m Signal D A Radio OP CL A Radio OP D A Radio OP CL A Line PR D A Line PR CL A Line PR D A Line PR CL A Radio PR D A Radio PR CL A Radio PR D A Radio PR Ground

DCCR

In/Out

Level

Service channels

13-8

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions

Connectors

Modem Unit X71 Sub-D 3p m Pin Signal 1 2 BAT 1 3 BAT 1 + BAT 1

In/Out

Supply voltage Level 1st channel 19...75 V DC

Modem Unit X72 Sub-D 3p m Pin Signal 1 2 BAT 2 3 BAT 2 + BAT 2 Level Supply voltage 19...75 V DC 2nd channel 19...75 V DC

In/Out

Modem Unit X73 1.6/5.6 f Pin Signal 1 IF-MD1 IF1

In/Out

Level -10 dBm

IF Modulator IF signal - 1st channel

Modem Unit X74 1.6/5.6 f Pin Signal 1 IF-DM1 IF1

In/Out

Level -10 dBm

IF Demodulator IF signal - 1st channel

Modem Unit X75 1.6/5.6 f Pin Signal 1 IF-MD2 IF2

In/Out

Level -10 dBm

IF Modulator IF signal - 2nd channel

Modem Unit X76 1.6/5.6 f Pin Signal 1 IF-DM2 IF2

In/Out

Level -10 dBm

IF Demodulator IF signal - 2nd channel

RF/160 OI

13-9

Connectors

Operating Instructions

Modem Unit X77 Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

Sub-D 15p m Signal ADR A0 ADR A2 ADR A4 ADR B0 ADR B2 ADR B4 Fan a Fan b ADR A1 ADR A3 ADR A5 ADR B1 ADR B3 ADR B5 Ground

MST-ADR

In/Out

Level

Addresses MU address connector Bit A0...A5 - left modem Bit B0...B5 - right modem

Modem Unit X78 Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

Sub-D 15p f Signal Ground +5.2 V LA Tx OP LA Rx OP LA Tx PR LA Rx PR +5.2 V Ground Ground +5.2 V EA Tx OP EA Rx OP EA Tx PR EA Rx PR +5.2 V

RC

In/Out

Level

Alarm relays Control for optional relay module

13-10

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions

Connectors

Modem Unit X79 Sub-D 9p m Pin Signal 1 LA/EA Rx B 2 BFI B 3 LA/EA Rx B 4 BFI B 5 Ground 6 LA/EA Rx A 7 BFI A 8 LA/EA Rx A 9 BFI A Modem Unit X81 Sub-D 9p f Pin Signal 1 2 N_LON 3 4 5 6 7 LON 8 9 Modem Unit X82 Sub-D 9p m Pin Signal 1 2 N_LON 3 4 5 6 7 LON 8 9

BFI-ESG

OP OP PR PR OP OP PR PR

In/Out

Level V.11 positive

Error pulses RPS bit error pulses

negative

LON W

In/Out

Level

LON E

In/Out

Level

RF/160 OI

13-11

Connectors

Operating Instructions

Modem Unit X89 1.6/5.6 f Pin Signal 1 CMI PR1/2

OP

In/Out

Level CMI

BB STM-1 BB to RPSC #2

Modem Unit X90 1.6/5.6 f Pin Signal 1 CMI PR1/2

In/Out OP

BB STM-1 CMI BB to RPSC #2

Modem Unit X91 1.6/5.6 f Pin Signal 1 CMI PR1/1

OP

In/Out

BB STM-1 CMI BB to RPSC #1

Modem Unit X92 1.6/5.6 f Pin Signal 1 CMI PR1/1

OP

In/Out

Level CMI

BB STM-1 BB to RPSC #1

13-12

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions

Connectors

Modem Unit X95 1.6/5.6 f Pin Signal 1 CMI PR2/1

PR

In/Out

Level CMI

BB STM-1 BB to RPSC #1

Modem Unit X96 1.6/5.6 f Pin Signal 1 CMI PR2/1

PR

In/Out

Level CMI

BB STM-1 BB to RPSC #1

Modem Unit X99 1.6/5.6 f Pin Signal 1 CMI PR2/2

PR

In/Out

Level CMI

BB STM-1 BB to RPSC #2

Modem Unit X100 Pin 1 CMI

1.6/5.6 f Signal PR

PR2/2

In/Out

Level CMI

BB STM-1 BB to RPSC #2

RF/160 OI

13-13

Connectors

Operating Instructions

13.3.1 Connectors of the SPI El. and SPI Opt. module


SPI Electrical X1 1.6/5.6 f Pin Signal 1 STM-1 STM-1

In/Out

Level CMI

BB STM-1 BB

SPI Electrical X2 1.6/5.6 f Pin Signal 1 STM-1 STM-1

In/Out

Level CMI

BB STM-1 BB

SPI Electrical X3 1.6/5.6 f Pin Signal 1 STM-1 STM-1

In/Out

Level CMI

BB STM-1 BB test socket

SPI Optical X... DIN 47256, Euro 2000, SCPC Pin Signal In/Out 1 STM-1 STM-1

Level -10 dBm

BB STM-1 BB NRZ 1310 nm monomode

13-14

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions

Connectors

13.4 Connectors of the Overhead Access Unit


E2 64 kbit/s V.11 1+0 2 Mbit/s 1+0 / 1+1 75 W E2 64 kbit/s V.11 1+0 2 Mbit/s 1+0 / 1+1 75 W

X46 X113/114 X115/116

X45 X105/106 X107/108 X75 X55 X51 X53

West

X76 X56 X52 X54

2 Mbit/s 1+0 / 1+1 120 W 4x64 kbit/s 1+1 E1 64 kbit/s 1+1 F1 64 kbit/s 1+1 SOH Extension Module

2 Mbit/s 1+0 / 1+1 120 W 4x64 kbit/s 1+1 E1 64 kbit/s 1+1 F1 64 kbit/s 1+1

East

X63 OP X64 PR

SOH

SOH Access Module

SOH

X61 OP X62 PR

19...75 V
X71

X1

OHAU PS 19...75 V
X81 X39

F RS 232

SISA 0/N LON W Q W RS 485

X82 X38

LON E Q E RS 485

PSTN EOW Branch EOW Module #2

X1

Q Interface Module SISA K

X43 X47 X42

F RS 232 Q RS 485 64 kbit/s G.703 1+1 / V.11 Q CON RS 485

X35 X35

X36

X41 X37 X31

X67 OP X68 PR

RFCOH

RFCOH Module West

PSTN EOW Branch EOW Module #1 Remote Handset

RFCOH Module East

RFCOH

X65 OP X66 PR

X32 X109/110 X111/112 X74

X32

X33

X40

Alternatively to the QD2 interface module, the ECC Gateway module can be used. 2 Mbit/s 1+1 75 W 4x64 kbit/s 1+1 4x64 kbit/s 1+1 ext. 4x64 kbit/s 1+1
X34 X59 X101/102 X103/104

2 Mbit/s 1+1 75 W 2 Mbit/s 1+1 120 W 4x64 kbit/s 1+1 4x64 kbit/s 1+1

2W / 6W

Analog 0.3-3.4 kHz

2 Mbit/s 1+1 120 W X73

X60

X30

64 kbit/s 1+1

North

ECC Gateway Module SISA-V(K)

X601 X43 X600 X42

F RS 232 Q RS485 LAN (10Base-T) Q RS485

Fig. 13-1:

OHAU block diagram

RF/160 OI

13-15

Connectors

Operating Instructions

Overhead Access Unit X30 Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Sub-D 9p m Signal DSC1 a DSC1 a DSC2 a DSC2 a Ground DSC1 b DSC1 b DSC2 b DSC2 b

In/Out OP OP PR PR OP OP PR PR

EOW 1 EXT Level External service channels in EOW1 module 64 kbit/s cod. ITU-T G.703 120 Ohm East Only without Radio East direction

Overhead Access Unit X31 Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Sub-D 9p m Signal DSC1 a DSC1 a DSC2 a DSC2 a Ground DSC1 b DSC1 b DSC2 b DSC2 b

In/Out OP OP PR PR OP OP PR PR

EOW 2 EXT Level External service channels in EOW2 module 64 kbit/s cod. ITU-T G.703 120 Ohm East Only without Radio East direction

13-16

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions

Connectors

Overhead Access Unit X32 Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Sub-D 9p m Signal PSTN 2 a PSTN 1 a PSTN 2 S1 Telephone L a Ground PSTN 2 b PSTN 1 b PSTN 2 S1 Telephone L b

In/Out

Level analog analog

EOW 1 EXT S 2W/6W PSTN via EOW1 0.3...3.4 kHz 600 Ohm 0.3...3.4 kHz 600 Ohm

Remote parallel telephone set analog analog 0.3...3.4 kHz 600 Ohm 0.3...3.4 kHz 600 Ohm Remote parallel telephone set

Overhead Access Unit X33 Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Sub-D 9p m Signal D D Ground D D

In/Out

Level

EOW 1 A External analog service channels via EOW1

a a

OP OP

analog analog

0.3...3.4 kHz 600 Ohm 0.3...3.4 kHz 600 Ohm

b b

OP OP

analog analog

0.3...3.4 kHz 600 Ohm 0.3...3.4 kHz 600 Ohm

RF/160 OI

13-17

Connectors

Operating Instructions

Overhead Access Unit X34 Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Sub-D 9p m Signal N1 a N1 a N2 a N2 a Ground N1 b N1 b N2 b N2 b

OP OP OP OP OP OP OP OP

In/Out

EOW 1 Level Service channels via EOW1 branching 64 kbit/s cod. ITU-T G.703 120 Ohm North

Overhead Access Unit X35 Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Sub-D 9p m Signal PSTN 2 a PSTN 1 a PSTN 2 S1 Telephone L a Ground PSTN 2 b PSTN 1 b PSTN 2 S1 Telephone L b

In/Out

Level analog analog

EOW 2 EXT S 2W/6W PSTN via EOW1 0.3...3.4 kHz 600 Ohm 0.3...3.4 kHz 600 Ohm

Remote parallel telephone set analog analog 0.3...3.4 kHz 600 Ohm 0.3...3.4 kHz 600 Ohm Remote parallel telephone set

13-18

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions

Connectors

Overhead Access Unit X36 Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Sub-D 9p m Signal D D Ground D D

In/Out

EOW 2 A Level External analog service channels via EOW2 64 kbit/s cod. ITU-T G.703 120 Ohm

a a

PR PR

b b

PR PR

Overhead Access Unit X37 Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

N1 N1 N2 N2 Ground N1 N1 N2 N2

Sub-D 9p m EOW 2 N Signal In/Out Level Service channels via EOW2 branching 64 kbit/s cod. ITU-T G.703 120 Ohm North a PR a PR a PR a PR b b b b PR PR PR PR

RF/160 OI

13-19

Connectors

Operating Instructions

Overhead Access Unit X38 Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

Sub-D 15p m Signal Ground RS 485 RS 485 Ground RS 485 RS 485 Ta Ra

QE

In/Out

Level RS 485

SISA-0 Station bus (Slave) East to next unit or X42/43 at QD2

Tb Rb

Overhead Access Unit X39 Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

Sub-D 15p m Signal Ground RS 485 Ta RS 485 Ra Ground RS 485 Tb RS 485 Rb -

QW

In/Out

Level RS 485

SISA-0 Station bus (Slave) West to next unit or X42/43 at QD2

13-20

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions

Connectors

Overhead Access Unit X40 Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Sub-D 9p m Signal Telephone L Ground Telephone L -

In/Out

Level

EOW 1 INT S Analog telephone connection to EOW1

analog

Connection of a local telephone 0.3-3.4 kHz 600 Ohm

analog

Connection of a local telephone 0.3-3.4 kHz 600 Ohm

Overhead Access Unit X41 Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Sub-D 9p m Signal Telephone L Ground Telephone L -

In/Out

Level

EOW 2 INT S Analog telephone connection to EOW2

analog

Connection of a local telephone 0.3-3.4 kHz 600 Ohm

analog

Connection of a local telephone 0.3-3.4 kHz 600 Ohm

Overhead Access Unit X42a Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

Sub-D 15p m Signal Ground RS 485 ST Ta RS 485 ST Ra Ground RS 485 ST Tb RS 485 ST Rb -

Q CON

In/Out

Level RS 485

SISA SISA-K QD2 With relay and terminal station operation / Master

RF/160 OI

13-21

Connectors

Operating Instructions

Overhead Access Unit X42b Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

Sub-D 15p m Signal Ground RS 485 ST Ra RS 485 ST Ta Ground RS 485 ST Rb RS 485 ST Tb -

Q CON

In/Out

Level RS 485

SISA SISA-K QD2 With headend operation / Slave

Overhead Access Unit X43a Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

Sub-D 15p m Signal Ground RS 485 ST Ta RS 485 ST Ra Ground RS 485 ST Tb RS 485 ST Rb -

Q LOC

In/Out

Level RS 485

Q-Management QD2 station bus (pseudo-bus) With relay and terminal station operation / Master

13-22

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions

Connectors

Overhead Access Unit X43b Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

Sub-D 15p m Signal Ground RS 485 ST Ra RS 485 ST Ta Ground RS 485 ST Rb RS 485 ST Tb -

Q LOC

In/Out

Level RS 485

Q-Management QD2 station bus (pseudo-bus) With headend operation / Slave

Overhead Access Unit X45 Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25

Sub-D 25p m Signal E2D B E2CL B E2S B E2D B E2CL B E2S B E2D B E2CL B E2S B E2D B E2CL B E2S B Ground E2D A E2CL A E2S A E2D A E2CL A E2S A E2D A E2CL A E2S A E2D A E2CL A E2S A

SOH E2 E

OP OP OP OP OP OP PR PR PR PR PR PR OP OP OP OP OP OP PR PR PR PR PR PR

In/Out

Level V.11 positive

Service channels 64 kbit/s E2 byte in SOH East

negative

RF/160 OI

13-23

Connectors

Operating Instructions

Overhead Access Unit X46 Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25

Sub-D 25p m Signal E2D B E2CL B E2S B E2D B E2CL B E2S B E2D B E2CL B E2S B E2D B E2CL B E2S B Ground E2D A E2CL A E2S A E2D A E2CL A E2S A E2D A E2CL A E2S A E2D A E2CL A E2S A

SOH E2 W

OP OP OP OP OP OP PR PR PR PR PR PR OP OP OP OP OP OP PR PR PR PR PR PR

In/Out

Level V.11 positive

Service channels 64 kbit/s E2 byte in SOH West

negative

Overhead Access Unit X47a Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Sub-D 9p m Signal QD D B QD CL B QD D B QD CL B Ground QD D A QD CL A QD D A QD CL A

QSC EXT

OP PR OP PR OP PR OP PR

In/Out

Level V.11 positive

Q-Management External QD2 signal

negative

13-24

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions

Connectors

Overhead Access Unit X47b Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Sub-D 9p m Signal QD D a OP QD D a PR QD D a OP QD D a PR Ground QD D b OP QD D b PR QD D b OP QD D b PR

QSC EXT In/Out Level Q-Management 64 kbit/s cod. Ext. QD2 signal acc. to ITU-T G.703 120 Ohm

Overhead Access Unit X51 Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Sub-D 9p m Signal E1 b E1 b Ground E1 a E1 a -

SOH E1 E

In/Out

Level Service channels 64 kbit/s cod. ITU-T G.703 120 Ohm E1 byte in SOH East

Overhead Access Unit X52 Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Sub-D 9p m Signal E1 b E1 b Ground E1 a E1 a -

SOH E1 W

In/Out

Level Service channels 64 kbit/s cod. ITU-T G.703 120 Ohm E1 byte in SOH West

RF/160 OI

13-25

Connectors

Operating Instructions

Overhead Access Unit X53 Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Sub-D 9p m Signal F1 b F1 b Ground F1 a F1 a -

SOH F1 E In/Out Level Service channels 64 kbit/s cod. ITU-T G.703 120 Ohm F1 byte in SOH East

Overhead Access Unit X54 Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Sub-D 9p m Signal F1 b F1 b Ground F1 a F1 a -

SOH F1 W

In/Out

Level Service channels 64 kbit/s cod. ITU-T G.703 120 Ohm F1 byte in SOH West

13-26

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions

Connectors

Overhead Access Unit X55 Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25

Sub-D 25p m Signal Ground DSC9 b DSC9 b Ground DSC10 b DSC10 b Ground DSC11 b DSC11 b Ground DSC12 b DSC12 b Ground Ground DSC9 a DSC9 a Ground DSC10 a DSC10 a Ground DSC11 a DSC11 a Ground DSC12 a DSC12 a

In/Out

DSC 9...12 E Level Service channels 64 kbit/s cod. ITU-T G.703 120 Ohm 4x64 k in SOH East

RF/160 OI

13-27

Connectors

Operating Instructions

Overhead Access Unit X56 Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25

Sub-D 25p m Signal Ground DSC9 b DSC9 b Ground DSC10 b DSC10 b Ground DSC11 b DSC11 b Ground DSC12 b DSC12 b Ground Ground DSC9 a DSC9 a Ground DSC10 a DSC10 a Ground DSC11 a DSC11 a Ground DSC12 a DSC12 a

In/Out

DSC 9...12 W Level Service channels 64 kbit/s cod. G.703 120 Ohm 4x64 k in SOH West

13-28

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions

Connectors

Overhead Access Unit X59 Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37

Sub-D 37p m Signal Ground DSC1 b DSC1 b DSC2 b DSC2 b DSC3 b DSC3 b DSC4 b DSC4 b DSC5 b DSC5 b DSC6 b DSC6 b DSC7 b DSC7 b DSC8 b DSC8 b Ground Ground Ground DSC1 a DSC1 a DSC2 a DSC2 a DSC3 a DSC3 a DSC4 a DSC4 a DSC5 a DSC5 a DSC6 a DSC6 a DSC7 a DSC7 a DSC8 a DSC8 a Ground

In/Out

DSC 1...8 E Level Service channels 64 kbit/s cod. G.703 120 Ohm 8x64 k in RFCOH East

RF/160 OI

13-29

Connectors

Operating Instructions

Overhead Access Unit X60 Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37

Sub-D 37p m Signal Ground DSC1 b DSC1 b DSC2 b DSC2 b DSC3 b DSC3 b DSC4 b DSC4 b DSC5 b DSC5 b DSC6 b DSC6 b DSC7 b DSC7 b DSC8 b DSC8 b Ground Ground Ground DSC1 a DSC1 a DSC2 a DSC2 a DSC3 a DSC3 a DSC4 a DSC4 a DSC5 a DSC5 a DSC6 a DSC6 a DSC7 a DSC7 a DSC8 a DSC8 a Ground

In/Out

DSC 1...8 W Level Service channels 64 kbit/s cod. G.703 120 Ohm 8x64 k in RFCOH West

13-30

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions

Connectors

Overhead Access Unit X71 Sub-D 3p m Pin Signal 1 2 BAT 1 3 BAT 1 + BAT 1 Level 19...75 V DC Floating

In/Out

Supply voltage

Overhead Access Unit X73 Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

Sub-D 15p m Signal 2048 k b Ground 2048 k b Ground 2048 k b Ground 2048 k b Ground 2048 k a Ground 2048 k a Ground 2048 k a Ground 2048 k a

ROH WSC E

OP OP PR PR OP OP PR PR

In/Out

Level HDB-3

Service channels 2048 kbit/s G.703 120 Ohm in RFCOH East

RF/160 OI

13-31

Connectors

Operating Instructions

Overhead Access Unit X74 Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

Sub-D 15p m Signal 2048 k b Ground 2048 k b Ground 2048 k b Ground 2048 k b Ground 2048 k a Ground 2048 k a Ground 2048 k a Ground 2048 k a

ROH WSC W

OP OP PR PR OP OP PR PR

In/Out

Level HDB-3

Service channels 2048 kbit/s G.703 120 Ohm in RFCOH West

13-32

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions

Connectors

Overhead Access Unit X75 Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

Sub-D 15p m Signal 2048 k b Ground 2048 k b Ground 2048 k b Ground 2048 k b Ground 2048 k a Ground 2048 k a Ground 2048 k a Ground 2048 k a

SOH WSC E

OP OP PR PR OP OP PR PR

In/Out

Level HDB-3

Service channels 2048 kbit/s G.703 120 Ohm in SOH East

Overhead Access Unit X76 Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

Sub-D 15p m Signal 2048 k b Ground 2048 k b Ground 2048 k b Ground 2048 k b Ground 2048 k a Ground 2048 k a Ground 2048 k a Ground 2048 k a

SOH WSC W

OP OP PR PR OP OP PR PR

In/Out

Level HDB-3

Service channels 2048 kbit/s G.703 120 Ohm in SOH West

RF/160 OI

13-33

Connectors

Operating Instructions

Overhead Access Unit X81 Sub-D 9p f Pin Signal 1 2 N_LON 3 4 5 6 7 LON 8 9 Overhead Access Unit X82 Sub-D 9p m Pin Signal 1 2 N_LON 3 4 5 6 7 LON 8 9 LON E LON W

In/Out

Level

In/Out

Level

Overhead Access Unit X101 1.6/5.6 f Pin Signal 1 2048 k RE1 OUT

OP

In/Out

Level HDB-3

Service channels 2048 kbit/s G.703 75 Ohm in RFCOH East

13-34

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions

Connectors

Overhead Access Unit X102 1.6/5.6 f Pin Signal 1 2048 k RE1 IN

OP

In/Out

Level HDB-3

Service channels 2048 kbit/s G.703 75 Ohm in RFCOH East

Overhead Access Unit X103 1.6/5.6 f Pin Signal 1 2048 k RE2 OUT

PR

In/Out

Level HDB-3

Service channels 2048 kbit/s G.703 75 Ohm in RFCOH East

Overhead Access Unit X104 1.6/5.6 f Pin Signal 1 2048 k RE2 IN

PR

In/Out

Level HDB-3

Service channels 2048 kbit/s G.703 75 Ohm in RFCOH East

Overhead Access Unit X105 1.6/5.6 f Pin Signal 1 2048 k SE1 OUT

OP

In/Out

Level HDB-3

Service channels 2048 kbit/s G.703 75 Ohm in SOH East

Overhead Access Unit X106 1.6/5.6 f Pin Signal 1 2048 k SE1 IN

OP

In/Out

Level HDB-3

Service channels 2048 kbit/s G.703 75 Ohm in SOH East

Overhead Access Unit X107 1.6/5.6 f Pin Signal 1 2048 k SE2 OUT

PR

In/Out

Level HDB-3

Service channels 2048 kbit/s G.703 75 Ohm in SOH East

RF/160 OI

13-35

Connectors

Operating Instructions

Overhead Access Unit X108 1.6/5.6 f Pin Signal 1 2048 k SE2 IN

PR

In/Out

Level HDB-3

Service channels 2048 kbit/s G.703 75 Ohm in SOH East

Overhead Access Unit X109 1.6/5.6 f Pin Signal 1 2048 k RW1 OUT

OP

In/Out

Level HDB-3

Service channels 2048 kbit/s G.703 75 Ohm in RFCOH West

Overhead Access Unit X110 1.6/5.6 f Pin Signal 1 2048 k RW1 IN

OP

In/Out

Level HDB-3

Service channels 2048 kbit/s G.703 75 Ohm in RFCOH West

Overhead Access Unit X111 1.6/5.6 f Pin Signal 1 2048 k RW2 OUT

PR

In/Out

Level HDB-3

Service channels 2048 kbit/s G.703 75 Ohm in RFCOH West

Overhead Access Unit X112 1.6/5.6 f Pin Signal 1 2048 k RW2 IN

PR

In/Out

Level HDB-3

Service channels 2048 kbit/s G.703 75 Ohm in RFCOH West

Overhead Access Unit X113 1.6/5.6 f Pin Signal 1 2048 k SW1 OUT

OP

In/Out

Level HDB-3

Service channels 2048 kbit/s G.703 75 Ohm in SOH West

13-36

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions

Connectors

Overhead Access Unit X114 1.6/5.6 f Pin Signal 1 2048 k SW1 IN

OP

In/Out

Level HDB-3

Service channels 2048 kbit/s G.703 75 Ohm in SOH West

Overhead Access Unit X115 1.6/5.6 f Pin Signal 1 2048 k SW2 OUT

PR

In/Out

Level HDB-3

Service channels 2048 kbit/s G.703 75 Ohm in SOH West

Overhead Access Unit X116 1.6/5.6 f Pin Signal 1 2048 k SW2 IN

PR

In/Out

Level HDB-3

Service channels 2048 kbit/s G.703 75 Ohm in SOH West

Overhead Access Unit X117 Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Sub-D 9p m Signal SISA D1 SISA D7 SISA D3 SISA D4 SISA D5 SISA D6 SISA D7 SISA D8 Ground

RC SISA

In/Out

Level

Alarm inputs Floating alarm contacts SISA (NO/NC)

RF/160 OI

13-37

Connectors

Operating Instructions

13.4.1 Connectors of SISA- 0/N and Q modules


SISA-0/N module in the OHAU X1 Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Sub-D 9p f Signal CDC Tx D RxD DTR Ground DSR RTS CTS

SISA-0/N

In/Out

Level RS 232

F-interface SISA-0/N Local F-interface for system configuration

QTN module in the OHAU X1 Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Sub-D 9p m Signal CDC Tx D RxD DTR Ground DSR RTS CTS

In/Out

Level RS 232

F-interface SISA K Local F-interface SISA-K

13-38

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions

Connectors

13.5 Connectors of RPS-C and RPS-H modules


RPS-C X10 1.6/5.6 f Pin Signal 1 PR1/2 Tx PR1/2

In/Out

Level CMI

BB BB STM-1 to PR1 or PR2

RPS-C X11 1.6/5.6 f Pin Signal 1 OP1 Tx OP1

In/Out

Level CMI

BB BB STM-1 OP1

RPS-C X12 1.6/5.6 f Pin Signal 1 OP2/9 Tx OP2/9

In/Out

Level CMI

BB BB STM-1 from OP2 or OP9

RPS-C X13 1.6/5.6 f Pin Signal 1 OP3/10 Tx OP3/10

In/Out

Level CMI

BB BB STM-1 from OP3 or OP10

RPS-C X14 1.6/5.6 f Pin Signal 1 OP4/11 Tx OP4/11

In/Out

Level CMI

BB BB STM-1 from OP4 or OP11

RPS-C X15 1.6/5.6 f Pin Signal 1 OP5/12 Tx OP5/12

In/Out

Level CMI

BB BB STM-1 from OP5 or OP12

RF/160 OI

13-39

Connectors

Operating Instructions

RPS-C X16 1.6/5.6 f Pin Signal 1 OP6/13 Tx OP6/13

In/Out

Level CMI

BB BB STM-1 from OP6 or OP13

RPS-C X17 1.6/5.6 f Pin Signal 1 OP7/14 Tx OP7/14

In/Out

Level CMI

BB BB STM-1 from OP7 or OP14

RPS-C X18 1.6/5.6 f Pin Signal 1 OP8 Tx OP8

In/Out

Level CMI

BB BB STM-1 from OP8 or 2nd RPSC

RPS-C X19 1.6/5.6 f Pin Signal 1 PR1/2 PR1/2

In/Out

Level CMI

BB BB STM-1 from PR1 or PR2

RPS-C X20 1.6/5.6 f Pin Signal 1 PR1/2 Rx PR1/2

In/Out

Level CMI

BB BB STM-1 from PR1 or PR2

RPS-C X21 1.6/5.6 f Pin Signal 1 OP1 Rx OP1

In/Out

Level CMI

BB BB STM-1 from OP1

13-40

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions

Connectors

RPS-C X22 1.6/5.6 f Pin Signal 1 OP2/9 Rx OP2/9

In/Out

Level CMI

BB BB STM-1 from OP2 or OP9

RPS-C X23 1.6/5.6 f Pin Signal 1 OP3/10 Rx OP3/10

In/Out

Level CMI

BB BB STM-1 from OP3 or OP10

RPS-C X24 1.6/5.6 f Pin Signal 1 OP4/11 Rx OP4/11

In/Out

Level CMI

BB BB STM-1 from OP4 or OP11

RPS-C X25 1.6/5.6 f Pin Signal 1 OP5/12 Rx OP5/12

In/Out

Level CMI

BB BB STM-1 from OP5 or OP12

RPS-C X26 1.6/5.6 f Pin Signal 1 OP6/13 Rx OP6/13

In/Out

Level CMI

BB BB STM-1 from OP6 or OP13

RPS-C X27 1.6/5.6 f Pin Signal 1 OP7/14 OP7/14

In/Out

Level CMI

BB BB STM-1 from OP7 or OP14

RF/160 OI

13-41

Connectors

Operating Instructions

RPS-C X28 1.6/5.6 f Pin Signal 1 OP8 Rx OP8

In/Out

Level CMI

BB BB STM-1 from OP8 or 2nd RPS-C

RPS-C X29 1.6/5.6 f Pin Signal 1 PR1/2 Rx PR1/2

In/Out

Level CMI

BB BB STM-1 to PR1 or PR2

13-42

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions

Ordering Information

14 Ordering Information
14.1 CE compliance
Marconi Communications GmbH declares that this product complies with the basic requirements of 3 and all other relevant regulations of the FTEG (Article 3 of R&TTE, 1999 / 05 / EC) provided that it is properly used and operated.
MDRS 155/. . .-64/128 MLQAM E CE label (example) EU guideline R&TTE, 1999 / 05/EC

Approved, comprehensive quality Registration no.: assurance system Q811250M

to Annex 5, R&TTE 1999/05/EC

14.2 Ordering information


Ident. nos.
AN00071970 AN00103000 AN00065966 AN00065967 AN00065302 AN00065969 AN00101311 AN00065970 AN00101312 AN00101794 AN00101795 AN00101796 AN00101798 AN00101799 AN00097908 AN00097909 AN00097910 AN00097912 AN00097913 AN00097914 AN00090381 AN00081131 AN00100926 AN00081132 AN00100927 AN00065979 AN00066008 AN00065980 AN00066009 AN00065981 AN00066010 AN00065982 AN00100928 AN00066011 AN00100929 Transmitter 64 MLQAM MDRS 155/3900-64 Tx-E MDRS 155/3900-64 Tx-E MDRS 155/4700-64 Tx-E MDRS 155/6200-64 Tx-E MDRS 155/6800-64 Tx-E MDRS 155/7500-64 Tx-E MDRS 155/7500-64 Tx-E MDRS 155/8000-64 Tx-E MDRS 155/8000-64 Tx-E Transmitter 128 MLQAM MDRS 155/3600-128 Tx-E MDRS 155/3600-128 Tx-E MDRS 155/3900-128 Tx-E MDRS 155/6200-128 Tx-E MDRS 155/6200-128 Tx-E MDRS 155/7500-128 Tx-E MDRS 155/7500-128 Tx-E MDRS 155/7500-128 Tx-E MDRS 155/8000-128 Tx-E MDRS 155/8000-128 Tx-E MDRS 155/8000-128 Tx-E MDRS 155/13000-128 Tx-E Receiver 64 MLQAM MDRS 155/3900-64 Rx-E MDRS 155/3900-64 Rx-E MDRS 155/3900-64 RxD-E MDRS 155/3900-64 RxD-E MDRS 155/4700-64 Rx-E MDRS 155/4700-64 RxD-E MDRS 155/6200-64 Rx-E MDRS 155/6200-64 RxD-E MDRS 155/6800-64 Rx-E MDRS 155/6800-64 RxD-E MDRS 155/7500-64 Rx-E MDRS 155/7500-64 Rx-E MDRS 155/7500-64 RxD-E MDRS 155/7500-64 RxD-E

Additional remarks
ITU-R-F.635 ITU-R F.382 ITU-R F.1099 ITU-R F.383 ITU-R F.384 ITU-R F.385A1,3 ITU-R F.385A4 ITU-R F.386A1 ITU-R F.386A4 ITU-R F.497 ITU-R F.497 ITU-R F.382/497 ITU-R F.383 ITU-R F.497 ITU-R F.385A1,3 ITU-R F.385A4 ITU-R F.385A3 ITU-R F.386A1 ITU-R F.386A4 ITU-R F.386A3 ITU-R F.497 ITU-R F.635 ITU-R F.382 ITU-R F.635 ITU-R F.382 ITU-R F.1099 ITU-R F.1099 ITU-R F.383 ITU-R F.383 ITU-R F.384 ITU-R F.384 ITU-R F.385A1,3 ITU-R F.385A4 ITU-R F.385A1,3 ITU-R F.385A4

Drawing nos.
65.7214.200.00-001 65.7214.200.00-002 65.7210.200.00-001 65.7211.200.00-001 65.7203.200.00-001 65.7207.200.00-001 65.7207.200.00-002 65.7208.200.00-001 65.7208.200.00-002 65.7231.200.00-001 65.7231.200.00-002 65.7225.200.00-001 65.7230.200.00-001 65.7230.200.00-002 65.7229.200.00-001 65.7229.200.00-002 65.7229.200.00-003 65.7228.200.00-001 65.7228.200.00-002 65.7228.200.00-003 65.7222.200.00-001 65.7214.400.00-001 65.7214.400.00-002 65.7214.410.00-001 65.7214.410.00-002 65.7210.400.00-001 65.7210.410.00-001 65.7211.400.00-001 65.7211.410.00-001 65.7203.400.00-001 65.7203.410.00-001 65.7207.400.00-001 65.7207.400.00-002 65.7207.410.00-001 65.7207.410.00-002

CE declaration nos.
65.7214.200.00CE001 65.7214.200.00CE002 65.7210.200.00CE001 65.7211.200.00CE001 65.7203.200.00CE001 65.7207.200.00CE001 65.7207.200.00CE002 65.7208.200.00CE001 65.7208.200.00CE002 65.7231.200.00CE001 65.7231.200.00CE002 65.7225.200.00CE001 65.7230.200.00CE001 65.7230.200.00CE002 65.7229.200.00CE001 65.7229.200.00CE002 65.7229.200.00CE003 65.7228.200.00CE001 65.7228.200.00CE002 65.7228.200.00CE003 65.7222.200.00CE001 65.7214.400.00CE001 65.7214.400.00CE002 65.7214.410.00CE001 65.7214.410.00CE002 65.7210.400.00CE001 65.7210.410.00CE001 65.7211.400.00CE001 65.7211.410.00CE001 65.7203.400.00CE001 65.7203.410.00CE001 65.7207.400.00CE001 65.7207.400.00CE002 65.7207.410.00CE001 65.7207.410.00CE002

RF/160 OI

14-1

Ordering Information

Operating Instructions

Ident. nos.
AN00065983 AN00100930 AN00066012 AN00100931 AN00101800 AN00101801 AN00101803 AN00101804 AN00101807 AN00101810 AN00101812 AN00101813 AN00101816 AN00101817 AN00097900 AN00097901 AN00097902 AN00097903 AN00097904 AN00097905 AN00097927 AN00097928 AN00097929 AN00097930 AN00097931 AN00097932 AN00090372 AN00090370 AN00065971 AN00074928 AN00074088 AN00075400 AN00075396 AN00065972 AN00065974 AN00087382 AN00065975 AN00075009 AN00065976 AN00076336 AN00076337 AN00065977 AN00076375 AN00093839 AN00093844 AN00093849 AN00093854 MDRS 155/8000-64 Rx-E MDRS 155/8000-64 Rx-E MDRS 155/8000-64 RxD-E MDRS 155/8000-64 RxD-E Receiver 128 MLQAM MDRS 155/3600-128 Rx-E MDRS 155/3600-128 Rx-E MDRS 155/3600-128 RxD-E MDRS 155/3600-128 RxD-E MDRS 155/3900-128 Rx-E MDRS 155/3900-128 RxD-E MDRS 155/6200-128 Rx-E MDRS 155/6200-128 Rx-E MDRS 155/6200-128 RxD-E MDRS 155/6200-128 RxD-E MDRS 155/7500-128 Rx-E MDRS 155/7500-128 Rx-E MDRS 155/7500-128 Rx-E MDRS 155/7500-128 RxD-E MDRS 155/7500-128 RxD-E MDRS 155/7500-128 RxD-E MDRS 155/8000-128 Rx-E MDRS 155/8000-128 Rx-E MDRS 155/8000-128 Rx-E MDRS 155/8000-128 RxD-E MDRS 155/8000-128 RxD-E MDRS 155/8000-128 RxD-E MDRS 155/13000-128 Rx-E MDRS 155/13000-128 RxD-E Oscillators Oscillator 3.6 GHz Oscillator 3.6 GHz Oscillator 3.9 GHz Oscillator 3.9 GHz Oscillator 3.9 GHz Oscillator 4.7 GHz Oscillator 6.2 GHz Oscillator 6.2 GHz Oscillator 6.8 GHz Oscillator 6.8 GHz Oscillator 7.5 GHz Oscillator 7.5 GHz Oscillator 7.5 GHz Oscillator 8.0 GHz Oscillator 8.0 GHz Oscillator 13.0 GHz Oscillator 13.0 GHz Oscillator 13.0 GHz Oscillator 13.0 GHz

Additional remarks
ITU-R F.386A1 ITU-R F.386A4 ITU-R F.386A1 ITU-R F.386A4 ITU-R F.497 ITU-R F.497 ITU-R F.497 ITU-R F.497 ITU-R F.382/497 ITU-R F.382/497 ITU-R F.383 ITU-R F.497 ITU-R F.383 ITU-R F.497 ITU-R F.385A1,3 ITU-R F.385A4 ITU-R F.385A3 ITU-R F.385A1,3 ITU-R F.385A4 ITU-R F.385A3 ITU-R F.386A1 ITU-R F.386A4 ITU-R F.386A3 ITU-R F.386A1 ITU-R F.386A4 ITU-R F.386A3 ITU-R F.497 ITU-R F.497 3413-3771 3610-3969 3610-3969 3413-3771 3824-4190 4430-4990 5689-6152 6197-6740 6197-6740 6800-7233 6800-7233 7428-7638 7596-8388 7596-8388 8192-8468 12765-12849 12877-12961 13031-13115 13143-13227

Drawing nos.
65.7208.400.00-001 65.7208.400.00-002 65.7208.410.00-001 65.7208.410.00-002 65.7231.400.00-001 65.7231.400.00-002 65.7231.410.00-001 65.7231.410.00-002 65.7225.400.00-001 65.7225.410.00-001 65.7230.400.00-001 65.7230.400.00-002 65.7230.410.00-001 65.7230.410.00-002 65.7229.200.00-001 65.7229.200.00-002 65.7229.200.00-003 65.7229.410.00-001 65.7229.410.00-002 65.7229.410.00-003 65.7228.400.00-001 65.7228.400.00-002 65.7228.400.00-003 65.7228.410.00-001 65.7228.410.00-002 65.7228.410.00-003 65.7222.400.00-001 65.7222.410.00-001 65.7209.300.00-001 65.7209.300.00-030 65.7214.300.00-001 65.7214.300.00-054 65.7214.300.00-050 65.7210.300.00-001 65.7211.300.00-001 65.7211.300.00-034 65.7203.300.00-001 65.7203.300.00-016 65.7207.300.00-001 65.7207.300.00-058 65.7207.300.00-059 65.7208.300.00-001 65.7208.300.00-024 65.7222.300.00-006 65.7222.300.00-006 65.7222.300.00-011 65.7222.300.00-016

CE declaration nos.
65.7208.400.00CE001 65.7208.400.00CE002 65.7208.410.00CE001 65.7208.410.00CE002 65.7231.400.00CE001 65.7231.400.00CE002 65.7231.410.00CE001 65.7231.410.00CE002 65.7225.400.00CE001 65.7225.410.00CE001 65.7230.400.00CE001 65.7230.400.00CE002 65.7230.410.00CE001 65.7230.410.00CE002 65.7229.200.00CE001 65.7229.200.00CE002 65.7229.200.00CE003 65.7229.410.00CE001 65.7229.410.00CE002 65.7229.410.00CE003 65.7228.400.00CE001 65.7228.400.00CE002 65.7228.400.00CE003 65.7228.410.00CE001 65.7228.410.00CE002 65.7228.410.00CE003 65.7222.400.00CE001 65.7222.410.00CE001 65.7209.300.00CE 65.7209.300.00CE 65.7214.300.00CE 65.7214.300.00CE 65.7214.300.00CE 65.7210.300.00CE 65.7211.300.00CE 65.7211.300.00CE 65.7203.300.00CE 65.7203.300.00CE 65.7207.300.00CE 65.7207.300.00CE 65.7207.300.00CE 65.7208.300.00CE 65.7208.300.00CE 65.7222.300.00CE 65.7222.300.00CE 65.7222.300.00CE 65.7222.300.00CE

14-2

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions

Ordering Information

Ident. nos.
AN00066372 AN00081127 AN00061295 AN00090851 AN00090852 AN00061293 AN00101380 AN00061289 AN00061290 AN00061291 AN00061292 AN00094838 AN00094840 AN00074027 AN00066374 AN00066375 AN00066373 AN00061300 AN00066371 AN00061298 AN00066370 AN00061301 AN00213556 AN00096408 AN00037455 AN00037456 AN00037458 AN00061297 AN00067840 AN00045958 AN00061296 AN00219646 AN00096473 AN00096474 AN00098321 AN00098322 AN00109016 AN00109014 AN10609477 AN00069388 AN00069389 MODEM unit Modem Shelf SPI STM-1 EL SPI STM-1 OPT SPI STM-1 OPT SPI STM-1 OPT DPU/RPS STM-1 DPU/RPS STM-1 Controller Module MU Power Supply MD 155/140-64QAM DM 155/140-64QAM MD 155/140-128QAM DM 155/140-128QAM RPSI STM-1 RPS-C RPS-H OHA unit OHAU SHELF SOH Access Module SOH Ext. Module RFCOH ACC.MODULE RFCOH ACC.MODULE EOW Module ECC Gateway Handset OHAU PSTN 1 PSTN 2 ABZWEIG F1 SISA-0/N QD2 Interface Module SISA-K/2 RF OHAU Power Supply OHAU Power Supply Manuals BHB DRS155/-64/128 OM DRS155/-64/128 MO DRS155/64/128ES OM DRS155/64/128RU IHB DRS155/64/128 CM DRS155/64/128 DRS155/...-64/128 Software DRS 155 E GER DRS 155 E ENG

Additional remarks
LH STM-1 Interface SCPC flat 1310nm DIN 47256 flat 1310nm EURO 2000 flat 1310nm Data Unit Data Unit 1+1

Drawing nos.

CE declaration nos.
65.7205.110.00CE001 65.7205.180.00CE001 65.7205.130.00CE001 65.7205.130.00CE002 65.7205.130.00CE003 65.7205.140.00CE001 65.7205.140.00CE002 65.7205.170.00CE001 65.7205.185.00CE001 65.7205.150.00CE001 65.7205.155.00CE001 65.7205.600.00CE001 65.7205.610.00CE001 65.7205.125.00CE001 65.7205.500.00CE001 65.7205.505.00CE001 65.7205.310.00CE001 65.7205.320.00CE001 65.7205.325.00CE001 65.7205.330.00CE001 65.7205.330.00CE002 65.7205.340.00CE001 65.7205.350.00CE001 Third-party product 65.7186.342.00CE001 65.7186.344.00CE001 65.7186.346.00CE001 65.7205.380.00CE001 65.7205.390.00CE001 62.7032.400.00CE001 65.7205.370.00CE001 65.7205.370.00CE002 not required not required not required not required not required not required not required not required not required

65.7205.110.00-001 65.7205.180.00-001 65.7205.130.00-001 65.7205.130.00-002 65.7205.130.00-003 65.7205.140.00-001 65.7205.140.00-002 65.7205.170.00-001 65.7205.185.00-001 Mod. 155/140-64 MLQAM 65.7205.150.00-001 Demod. 155/140-64 MLQAM 65.7205.155.00-001 Mod. 155/140-128QAM 65.7205.600.00-001 Demod. 155/140-128 MLQAM 65.7205.610.00-001 Interface 65.7205.125.00-001 max. 7+1 (N+1, N+2) 65.7205.500.00-001 Hot Standby 65.7205.505.00-001 65.7205.310.00-001 65.7205.320.00-001 65.7205.325.00-001 65.7205.330.00-001 65.7205.330.00-002 65.7205.340.00-001 65.7205.350.00-001 65.1415.675.00-001 65.7186.342.00-001 65.7186.344.00-001 65.7186.346.00-001 65.7205.380.00-001 65.7205.390.00-001 62.7032.400.00-001 65.7205.370.00-001 65.7205.370.00-002 65.1220.000.10-001 65.1220.000.15-001 65.1220.000.16-001 65.1220.000.17-001 65.1220.000.35-001 65.1220.000.30-001 15.8565.004.00-001 65.7206.400.00-001 65.7206.410.00-001

Module I; 4x64k, 2048k Module II 8x64k, 2048k W. plate (Western RJ11) PSTN 4W Public Subscr. Term. Netw. 4W PSTN 6W Public Subscr. Term. Netw. 6W E+M EOW Branch. 3.Dir. Voice

when using ECC Gateway Operating Manual, German Operating Manual, English Operating Manual, Spanish Operating Manual, Russian Com. Man., German Com. Man., Englsh Install. Man., German (LMT) Applic. Softw., Ger. (LMT) Applic. Softw., Engl.

RF/160 OI

14-3

Ordering Information

Operating Instructions

This page has been left blank for editorial reasons.

14-4

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions

After-Sales Service

15 After-Sales Service
Digital Microwave Radio Systems from Marconi Communications GmbH are maintenance-free. If not otherwise agreed upon by contract, equipment repairs are limited to the replacement of complete modules. After exchanging faulty units, it must be ensured that the software versions of the new units are compatible with those of the system software releases previously used. For this purpose, a software download might be necessary. As far as there are no other contractual regulations, please send defective modules to the following address:

Marconi Communications GmbH Central Europe Repair Management Robert-Bosch-Str.10 01454 Radeberg Germany Repair Management
(during normal service hours)

Tel.:

+ 49 3528 / 456 - 267 or - 583 Fax: +49 3528 / 456 534

Front Line Support (FLS) Call numbers:


(24h/7D)

Tel.: 08000 / 6272664 Fax:


RF/160 OI

0800 / 1812275
15-1

Ordering Information

Operating Instructions

This page has been left blank for editorial reasons.

15-2

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions

Annex 1: Operating Instructions - EOW Module

16 Annex 1: Operating Instructions - EOW Module

RF/160 OI

16-1

Annex 1: Operating Instructions - EOW Module

Operating Instructions

16-2

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions

Annex 1: Operating Instructions - EOW Module

RF/160 OI

16-3

Annex 1: Operating Instructions - EOW Module

Operating Instructions

16-4

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions

Annex 1: Operating Instructions - EOW Module

RF/160 OI

16-5

Annex 1: Operating Instructions - EOW Module

Operating Instructions

16-6

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions

Annex 1: Operating Instructions - EOW Module

RF/160 OI

16-7

Annex 1: Operating Instructions - EOW Module

Operating Instructions

16-8

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions

Annex 2: Support of the QD2 Information Model

17 Annex 2: Support of the QD2 Information Model


17.1 QD2 view
At QD2 level, a microwave radio station is presented as SISA-V with its lower-order network elements MDRS 155 E and XQI. A MDRS 155 E network element always consists of a microwave radio terminal with a radio direction and a line direction. Regenerator stations are composed of two microwave radio terminals interconnected on the line side via baseband interfaces. In this case, two MDRS 155 E network elements (WEST and EAST) are required.

SISA-V

SISA-V

DRS155E

XQI

DRS155E

DRS155E

XQI

Fig. 17-1:

QD2 view of a microwave radio terminal (left) or regenerator station (right)

The following figure shows an example of the functional groups of a MDRS 155 E network element with and without line protection.

SISA0

SCU

SISA0

PSU

SCU

RX RTF-1 or RTFE-1 RTF-1 or RTFE-1

RX

RRTF-1

OP1

RRTF-1

OP1

TX

TX

RX RTF-1 or RTFE-1 RTF-1 or RTFE-1

RX

RRTF-1

OP2

RRTF-1

PR1

TX

TX

Fig. 17-2:

MDRS 155 E-2+0(left) and 1+1conf. with occasional traffic (right)

RF/160 OI

17-1

Annex 2: Support of the QD2 Information Model

Operating Instructions

17.2 Functional groups supported


Functional group Abbreviation Meaning

SISA0 Regenerator Transport Function STM-1 Regenerator Transport Function Electrical STM-1 Radio Relay Transport Function STM-1

SISA0 RTF-1 RTFE-1 RRTF-1

Monitoring and station monitoring data Optical baseband port STM-1 with Regenerator Section Termination Electrical baseband port STM-1 with Regenerator Section Termination Radio-side Regenerator Section Termination Contains the data of the incoming radio signal, but is not identical with a physical receiver! With equipment protection, RX also controls and monitors the receive-side protection switching processes. Contains the data of the outgoing radio signal, but is not identical with a physical transmitter! With equipment protection, TX also controls and monitors the transmit-side protection switching processes. Controls and monitors the protection switching processes in case of microwave radio systems with line protection. Monitoring of RF service channels Monitoring of signalling inputs (XQI)

Receiver

RX

Transmitter

TX

Protection Switching Unit Service Channel Unit Signalling Unit (Melde Einheit)

PSU SCU ME
5

17.3 Assignment of instances to microwave radio channels


For the functional groups RX, TX, RTF-1, RTFE-1 and RRTF-1, the following assignment of functional unit instances to microwave radio channels is applicable:
Microwave radio channel OP1...OP16 PR1 PR2 Functional unit instance 1...16 17 18

For the SISA0 and PSU functional groups, there is only instance 1. SCU functional group: See chapter 17.13 .

Within the XQI network element RF/160 OI

17-2

Operating Instructions

Annex 2: Support of the QD2 Information Model

17.4 SISA0 functional group 17.4.1 Application functions


Application function Spontaneous message (event) Request/response Command

Alarm information Alarm disabling and priority Date/Time User data Software version System configuration Service ID Reset Operational status Filetransfer download Equipment with modules Reference list Alarm list Nominal/actual equipment
7 6

X X -X -X X X X ----X

X X X X X X X -X X X X X X

-X X X --X X X X ---X

17.4.2 Alarm information


Description INT-A CONF

Monitoring disturbed (HW) Monitoring disturbed (SW) Impermissible configuration Actual equipment is not in compliance with specifications

X X X X

6 7

The alarm priority can be set, but will not be active. Simple configuration (MDRS155 Terminal NE) RF/160 OI

17-3

Annex 2: Support of the QD2 Information Model

Operating Instructions

17.5 RTF-1 functional group 17.5.1 Application functions


Application function Spontaneous message (event) Request/response Command

Alarm information Alarm disabling and priority Configuration Current performance values 15-min. performance values 24-h performance values Parameterization of performance measuring points Operational status User data Reference list

X X X ---X X X --

X X X X X X X X X X

-X X ---X X X --

17.5.2 Alarm information


Description INT-A INT-B Power ICN LOS LOF SD Lpow. Low

SPIO module defective Power supply module MUPS defective Loop switching or B1 inversion in the DPU module Communication failure on the internal LON bus LASER transmit failure Loss of baseband input signal Loss of sync (STM-1) Degradation of BB input signal (BER>2E-05)

X X X X X X X X X

17-4

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions

Annex 2: Support of the QD2 Information Model

17.5.3 Configuration
Configuration SOA view Status

ALS TXcmd B1invertTx

Laser safety shutdown <available / not available> Transmitter <ON / OFF> Laser control B1 byte <inverted / not inverted> on Tx side B1 byte inversion in line direction

r r r/w

17.5.4 Performance measuring points


Measuring point Description

Regenerator Section (BB incoming)

17.5.5 User data


Block no. Description

ASCII text (40 bytes) memorized in DPU module

RF/160 OI

17-5

Annex 2: Support of the QD2 Information Model

Operating Instructions

17.6 RTFE-1 functional group 17.6.1 Application functions


Application function Spontaneous message (event) Request/response Command

Alarm information Alarm disabling and priority Configuration Current performance values 15-min. performance values 24-h performance values Parameterization of performance measuring points Operational status User data Reference list

X X X ---X X X --

X X X X X X X X X X

-X X ---X X X --

17.6.2 Alarm information


Description INT-A INT-B Power Timing ICN LOS LOF SD

SPIE module defective Power supply module MUPS defective Loop switching or B1 inversion in the DPU module Communication failure on the internal LON bus Loss of baseband input signal Loss of sync (STM-1) Degradation of BB input signal (BER>2E-05)

X X X X

X X X X

17-6

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions

Annex 2: Support of the QD2 Information Model

17.6.3 Configuration
Configuration SOA view Status

B1invertTx

B1 byte <inverted / not inverted> on Tx side B1 byte inversion in line direction

r/w

17.6.4 Performance measuring points


Measuring point Description

Regenerator Section (BB incoming)

17.6.5 User data


Block no. Description

ASCII text (40 bytes) memorized in the DPU module

RF/160 OI

17-7

Annex 2: Support of the QD2 Information Model

Operating Instructions

17.7 RRTF-1 functional group 17.7.1 Application functions


Application function Spontaneous message (event) Request/response Command

Alarm information Alarm disabling and priority Configuration Current performance values 15-min. performance values 24-h performance values Parameterization of performance measuring points Operational status User data Reference list

X X X ---X X X --

X X X X X X X X X X

-X X ---X X X --

17.7.2 Alarm information


Description INT-A INT-B Power ICN LOF SD

DPU module defective or disturbed Power supply module MUPS defective Loop switching or B1 inversion in the DPU module Communication failure on the internal LON bus Loss of sync (STM-1 or RFCOH) Degradation of STM1 signal received (BER>2E-05)

X X X X X X X

17-8

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions

Annex 2: Support of the QD2 Information Model

17.7.3 Configuration
Configuration SOA view Status

B1invertTx

B1 byte <inverted / not inverted> on Tx side B1 byte inversion in radio direction

r/w

17.7.4 Performance measuring points


Measuring point Description

Regenerator Section (from radio direction)

17.7.5 User data


Block no. Description

2 3

ASCII text (40 bytes) memorized in the TX module ASCII text (40 bytes) memorized in the RX module

RF/160 OI

17-9

Annex 2: Support of the QD2 Information Model

Operating Instructions

17.8 RX functional group 17.8.1 Application functions


Application function Spontaneous message (event) Request/response Command

Alarm information Alarm disabling and priority Configuration Measuring value Measuring value thresholds Operational status Reference list

X X X X X X --

X X X X X X X

-X X -X X --

17.8.2 Alarm information


Description INT-A INT-B Timing ICN LOS MIS-ID XPIC

DEMOD module defective Receiver modules RX, RXDIV or RXOSC defective Power supply module MUPS defective DEMOD module faulty Receiver modules RX, RXDIV or RXOSC faulty Clock recovery problem in the DEMOD module Communication failure on the internal LON bus No valid IF input signal at the DEMOD module No valid combiner input signal at X23 and X24 of diversity receiver Loss of RF receive signal Receive signal includes wrong radio hop identifier XPIC function disturbed in DEMOD Loss of sync of Rx oscillators

X X X X X X X X X

X X X X

17-10

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions

Annex 2: Support of the QD2 Information Model

17.8.3 Configuration
Configuration SOA view Status

IDExpect Protection

Radio hop identifier <0...15> Expected radio hop identifier Redundancy <none / equipment protection>

r r

17.8.4 Measuring values


Measuring point Parameter measured Unit Resolution

1 2 5 6 11

Maximum Rx level in diversity mode (PMain , PDiversity) AGC voltage LO Opening of eye pattern - I-channel Opening of eye pattern - Q-channel Difference between Rx levels | PMain PDiversity |

dBm V % % dB

0.01 dBm 10 mV 1 1 1

RF/160 OI

17-11

Annex 2: Support of the QD2 Information Model

Operating Instructions

17.9 RX functional group for hot standby configurations


In the following sections, "A" is used for transmission path 1 (OP) and "B" for transmission path 2 (PR).

17.9.1 Application functions


Application function Spontaneous message (event) Request/response Command

Alarm information Alarm disabling and priority Configuration Measuring value Measuring value thresholds Operational status Reference list

X X X X X X --

X X X X X X X

-X X -X X --

17.9.2 Alarm information


Description INT-A INT-B Timing ICN LOS MIS-ID XPIC

Fault in path A AND B Fault EITHER in path A OR B Failure of the RPSH module Clock recovery problem in DEMOD A OR B Communication failure on the internal LON bus LOS in path A AND B Receive signal includes wrong radio hop identifier XPIC function in DEMOD A OR B faulty Loss of sync of Rx oscillators A OR B
Description

X X X X X X X X X

LOSA

LOSB

RXA

RXB

Threshold

Switch

LOS in path A LOS in path B Fault or failure in A Fault or failure in B Failure in RPSH module Number of protection switchover processes exceeded threshold

X X

X X X X X X

17-12

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions

Annex 2: Support of the QD2 Information Model

17.9.3 Configuration
Configuration SOA view Status

IDExpect Protection ActivRX Auto Threshold

Radio hop identifier <0...15> Expected radio hop identifier Redundancy <none / equipment protection> Active receiver <A / B> Automatic protection switching <ON / OFF> Alarm threshold <0 ... 65535> Threshold for the number of automatic protection switching processes within one 15-min. interval

r r r/w r/w r/w

17.9.4 Measuring values


Measuring point Parameter measured Unit Resolution

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 11 12

Maximum receive level in path A in diversity mode (PMain , PDiversity) AGC voltage LO in path A Maximum receive level in path B in diversity mode (PMain , PDiversity) AGC voltage LO in path B Opening of eye pattern, I-channel, A Opening of eye pattern, Q-channel, A Opening of eye pattern, I-channel, B Opening of eye pattern, Q-channel, B Difference between Rx levels | PMain PDiversity |, A Difference between Rx levels | PMain PDiversity |, B

dBm V dBm V % % % % dB dB

0.01 dBm 10 mV 0.01 dBm 10 mV 1 1 1 1 1 1

RF/160 OI

17-13

Annex 2: Support of the QD2 Information Model

Operating Instructions

17.10 17.10.1

TX functional group Application functions


Spontaneous message (event) Request/response Command

Application function

Alarm information Alarm disabling and priority Configuration Measuring value Measuring value thresholds Operational status Reference list

X X X X X X --

X X X X X X X

-X X -X X --

17.10.2
Description

Alarm information
INT-A INT-B Timing ICN LOSA

MOD module defective MOD module disturbed Transmitter modules TX or TXOSC defective No valid IF input signal at transmitter input X2 Power supply module MUPS defective Transmitter modules TX or TXOSC disturbed Clock problem in MOD module Communication failure on the internal LON bus No valid IF input signal at DEMOD

X X X X X X X X X X X

17-14

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions

Annex 2: Support of the QD2 Information Model

17.10.3
Configuration

Configuration
SOA view Status

IDSend Protection

Radio hop identifier <0...15> Radio hop identifier to the sent Redundancy <none / equipment protection>

r r

17.10.4

Measuring values
Unit Resolution

Measuring point Parameter measured

1 2 3

Transmit level Transmit level AGC voltage AGC voltage LO

dBm V V

0.01 dBm 10 mV 10 mV

RF/160 OI

17-15

Annex 2: Support of the QD2 Information Model

Operating Instructions

17.11

TX functional group for equipment protection (hot standby)

In the following sections, "A" is used for transmission path 1 (OP) and "B" for transmission path 2 (PR).

17.11.1

Application functions
Spontaneous message (event) Request/response Command

Application function

Alarm information Alarm disabling and priority Configuration Measuring value Measuring value thresholds Operational status Reference list

X X X X X X --

X X X X X X X

-X X -X X --

17.11.2
Description

Alarm information
INT-A INT-B Power Timing ICN LOSA

Defect in path A AND B Defect in the active Tx path Defect in the non-active Tx path Failure in path A OR B Power supply defective EITHER in A OR B Clock problem in MOD A or MOD B Communication failure on the internal LON bus No valid IF input signal at transmitter input X2 A

X X X X X X X X

Description

LOSB

Threshold

TXA

TXB

Switch

No valid IF input signal at transmitter input X2 B Number of switchover processes exceeded threshold Failure or defect in path A Failure or defect in path B Failure or defect in RPSH module Switch position on faulty Tx path

X X X X X X

17-16

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions

Annex 2: Support of the QD2 Information Model

17.11.3
Configuration

Configuration
SOA view Status

IDSend Protection ActivTX Auto Threshold

Radio hop identifier <0...15> Expected radio hop identifier Redundancy <none / equipment protection> Active transmitter <A / B> Automatic switchover <ON / OFF> Alarm threshold value <0 ... 65535> Threshold for the max. number of automatic protection switching processes within one 15-min. interval

r r r/w r/w r/w

17.11.4

Measuring values
Unit Resolution

Measuring point Parameter measured

1 2 3 4 5 6

Transmit level, transmitter A Tx level AGC voltage, transmitter A AGC voltage LO, transmitter A Transmit level, transmitter B Tx level AGC voltage, transmitter B AGC voltage LO, transmitter B

dBm V V dBm V V

0.01 dBm 10 mV 10 mV 0.01 dBm 10 mV 10 mV

RF/160 OI

17-17

Annex 2: Support of the QD2 Information Model

Operating Instructions

17.12 17.12.1

PSU functional group Application functions


Spontaneous message (event) Request/response Command

Application function

Alarm information Alarm disabling and priority Configuration Sampling parameters Current performance values 15-min. performance values 24-h performance values Parameterization of performance measuring points Operational status Reference list

X X X X ---X X --

X X X X X X X X X X

-X X X ---X X --

17.12.2
Description

Alarm information
INT-A
8

INT-B

Power

ICN

OCH x

TCH x

Defect or failure of a RPSC module Failure of CAN bus communication No valid OPx input signal from PR (Rx direction) No valid PR input signal from OPx (Tx direction) Alignment error in OPx Defect of a MUPS module Communication failure on the internal LON bus OP x cannot be protectionswitched automatically, since there is not free PR. Max. number of automatic OPx protection switching processes exceeded the threshold in the last 15-min. interval.

X X X X X X X X X

Not supported in "1+1 without occasional traffic" configurations RF/160 OI

17-18

Operating Instructions

Annex 2: Support of the QD2 Information Model

17.12.3

Configuration
SOA view Status

Configuration

Reception FD_BKx Priority BKx

Diversity (receiver) <ON/OFF> OPx works with/without frequency diversity on Rx side. Priority (receiver) <A / B> In case of automatic protection switching, OPx is treated with high/low priority. Automatic (receiver) <ON / OFF> In case of a failure, OPx is switched over automatically / locked out of protection. Setting (receiver) <Normal / EK1 / EK2> Baseband port OPx is connected to OPx / PR1 / PR2 on Rx side. Diversity (transmitter) <ON / OFF> OPx works with/without frequency diversity on Tx side. Graphical display with connecting lines Baseband port OPx is connected to OPx / PRy on Tx side.
PRy available / not available

r r/w

Auto BKx

r/w

Reception BAx Transmission FD_BKx Transmission BAx EK y impl OT Cmd Reception EKy OT status Reception EKy OT status Transmission EKy

r/w r r r r/w r

OT command (Receiver) <disabled.../loose.../fixed> Occasional traffic option for PRy disabled / loose / fixed. OT command (Receiver) <none.../loose.../fixed> Occasional traffic option for PRy disabled / loose / fixed on Rx side. OT command (Transmitter) <none.../loose.../fixed> Occasional traffic option for PRy disabled / loose / fixed on Tx side.

17.12.4

Performance measuring points


Description

Measuring point

1 ... 14

Number of automatic Rx-side protection switching processes for OP 1 Number of automatic Rx-side protection switching processes for OP 14

RF/160 OI

17-19

Annex 2: Support of the QD2 Information Model

Operating Instructions

17.13 17.13.1

SCU functional group Mapping service channels onto SCU instances and channels

Microwave terminals are configured as network elements WEST. Regenerator stations are always composed of two terminal network elements, i.e. one NE WEST and one NE EAST. All service channels, except those of RFCOH East, are mapped into SCU instances of network element WEST. The instance no. itself depends on the address of the associated OHA Unit in the system. The distinction between "East and "West for service channels is independent of the network element and indicates the direction of the service channel signals within one terminal, "West being the radio direction (from/to the radio hop) and "East" being the line direction (from/ the baseband interface).
OHAU address NE WEST Service channel direction "East" NE WEST Service channel direction "West" NE EAST Service channel direction "East"

1 2 3 4

SCU OP1 SCU OP3 SCU OP5 SCU OP7

SCU OP2 SCU OP4 SCU OP6 SCU OP8

SCU OP1 SCU OP3 SCU OP5 SCU OP7

SCU channel

SCU OP[1,3,5,7] NE WEST

SCU OP[2,4,6,8] NE WEST

SCU OP[1,3,5,7] NE EAST

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14

SOHA, DSC1-4 East SOHA, E1 East SOHA, F1 East SOHA, WSC East OP SOHA, WSC East PR -----SOHEXT, E2 East OP SOHEXT, E2 East PR SOHEXT, DCC East OP SOHEXT, DCC East PR

SOHA, DSC1-4 West SOHA, E1 West SOHA, F1 West SOHA, WSC West OP SOHA, WSC West PR RFCOH West, DSC1-4 RFCOH West, DSC5-8 RFCOH West, WSC OP RFCOH West, WSC PR -SOHEXT, E2 West OP SOHEXT, E2 West PR SOHEXT, DCC West OP SOHEXT, DCC West PR

-----RFCOH East, DSC1-4 RFCOH East, DSC5-8 RFCOH East, WSC OP RFCOH East, WSC PR ------

17-20

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions

Annex 2: Support of the QD2 Information Model

17.13.2

Application functions
Spontaneous message (event) Request/response Command

Application function

Alarm information Alarm disabling and priority Configuration Sampling parameters Operational status Reference list

X X X X X --

X X X X X X

-X X X X --

17.13.3
Description

Alarm information
INT-A INT-B Power ICN 1 ... 14

Defect of one of the modules assigned to the respective SCU Failure of one of the modules assigned to the respective SCU Defect of the OHAUPS module Communication failure on the internal LON bus Failure of the associated service channel

X X X

17.13.4
Configuration

Configuration
SOA view Status

SCx impl x = 1 ... 14 SCx used x = 1 ... 14

Service channel x is used <Listbox active / not active (dimmed)> The assigned service channel can be transmitted / cannot be transmitted. Service channel x is used <yes / no > AIS monitoring for service channel SCx is active / not active.

RF/160 OI

17-21

Annex 2: Support of the QD2 Information Model

Operating Instructions

17.14 17.14.1

ME functional group Application functions


Spontaneous message (event) Request/response Command

Application function

Alarm information Alarm disabling and priority Sampling parameters Configuration Operational status User data

X X X X X X

X X X X X X

-X X X X X

17.14.2

General

The unit supports eight input channels whose polarity (active high/low) can be configured individually.

17-22

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions

Annex 3: Co-channel Operation with XPIC

18 Annex 3: Co-channel Operation with XPIC


18.1 General
The present chapter describes the behaviour of MDRS 155 E systems in co-channel operation on crossed polarizations (CCDP mode) in case of equipment failures.

18.2 Functioning of a CCDP system


Fig. 18-1 shows a simplified block diagram of a CCDP microwave radio system. The transmitters "Tx H" and "Tx V transmit two independent (STM-1) data signals with the same frequency on crossed polarizations (H = horizontal, V = vertical). In the transmission channel, the signals are time-variably and frequency-selectively distorted on the respective polarization due to fading. This is shown in the below block diagram by the Hhh(f) and Hvv(f) filter functions. In the CCDP mode, there are additional cross-talk components between the two polarizations shown by the Hvh(f) and Hhv(f) functions.

Fig. 18-1:

Block diagram of a CCDP system

On the Rx side, the signals are first passing the receivers "Rx H and "Rx V. With the ATPC (Automatic Transmit Power Control) circuit activated, the transmitter output levels are controlled to obtain a constant Rx power. In normal operation, the control circuits on both polarizations work independently of each other. The downstream demodulators represent a simulation of the transmission channel used to compensate the signal distortions which are occurring on the latter. The adaptive channel equalizer (ATDE = Adaptive Time Domain Equalizer) compensates the linear distortions of the signals on the two polarizations. The frequency-selective cross-talk components between the two polarizations are eliminated by the cross-polarization equalizer (XPE).

18.3 Behaviour in case of radio hop failures


In an undisturbed transmission channel, the four channel transmission functions shown in Fig. 18-1 are constant irrespective of the frequency used. Hhh(f) and Hvv(f) represent the respective radio hop attenuation. The cross-talk components Hvh(f) and Hhv(f) correspond to the cross-polarization discrimination (XPD) of the antenna and are typically 35 dB. Under these circumstances, systems operating with 64 MLQAM and 128 MLQAM modulation permit an error-free transmission of the data signals even without the XPE function.

RF/160 OI

18-1

Annex 3: Co-channel Operation with XPIC

Operating Instructions

Radio hop failures are in most cases caused by fading effects. These are normally composed of a frequency-independent increase in the radio hop attenuation (flat fading) and a frequency-selective attenuation (selective fading). These flat fading portions in the two polarization planes are compensated by the ATPC circuit and a control amplifier in the receiver. The fading events on the respective polarization plane are accompanied by depolarization effects which are normally also frequency selective. The adaptive filters (ATDE and XPE) in the demodulators are used to compensate these distortion and cross-talk effects. The fading events on the individual polarization planes and the associated depolarization effects are correlated with respect to each other. However, the interference factors are so manifold that a general statement regarding the correlation strength is not possible. In order to permit the maximum protection for any channel situation, the various adaptive filters and ATPC circuits must operate independently of each other in the distorted channel. In contrast to the equipment failures described in section 18.4, fading effects do not occur suddently, but slowly. The control circuits of the ATPC, receiver, channel and cross-polarization equalizer are designed and adapted to each other so that they can follow the highest radio hop dynamics to be expected without any delay. The adaptive channel filters are able to equalize selective fading events and the associated crosspolar cross-talk effects up to the limits specified by the signatures. Fading parameters exceeding these limiting values lead to an increase in the bit error ratio up to a level, which exceeds the SES threshold as defined by ITU-T Rec. G.826 and results in a failure of the synchronization devices. In this case, the DPU module injects an AIS into the corresponding STM-1 signals.

18.4 Behaviour in case of equipment failures


Due to the relatively strong cross-polar coupling, failures occurring in a channel of the CCDP system may affect the transmission on the crossed polarization. In this conjunction, equipment failures are particularly critical, since they normally occur spontaneously, whereas the contol circuits compensating such effects cannot react without delay. In CCDP systems with cross-polarization equalizers there is a basic difference between equipment faults on the transmit side and those on the receive side. The following sections describe the consequences of such events and the corresponding system reactions.

18.4.1 Tx-side failure


Fig. 18-2 shows the situation of an equipment failure on the Tx side, which occurred on the vertical polarization in the example depicted below. This leads not only to a transmission failure on the vertical polarization, but also to a breakdown of the interference coupling from the vertical to the horizontal polarization. However, in this case, signal energy is still flowing in the opposite direction (H to V). Even in case of a high XPD factor, this energy is normally sufficient for the receiver RxV and the downstream signal processing units to synchronize themselves to the signal radiated in the horizontal polarization plane and to regenerate it without any bit errors.

Fig. 18-2:

Equipment failure on the transmit side (V)

18-2

RF/160 OI

Operating Instructions

Annex 3: Co-channel Operation with XPIC

In STM-1 signals, a polarization identifier is transmitted in addition to the radio hop identifier. Using this information under the fault conditions described, the system can identify a synchronization to the cross-polar data signal. The corresponding alarm is displayed by the DPU/RPS STM-1 module as radio hop ID alarm. It causes both cross-polarization equalizers, XPEhv and XPEvh, to be switched off, so that there can be no more overcouplings on the XPE paths. In consequence of the radio hop ID alarm, the DPU module of the vertical polarization plane injects AIS into the STM-1 signal transmitted in the line direction. The disconnection of the cross-polarization equalizers is signalled in the demodulator module as "XPIC not in operation" alarm. As soon as the faulty transmitter (V) is operational again, the system automatically returns to normal operation. In case of a strong cross-polar coupling in the transmission channel, a spontaneous equipment failure on the Tx side can lead to short-term transmission failures on the crossed polarization, since the internal control loops cannot react to the sudden change in the transmission parameters without delay.

18.4.2 Rx-side failure


The behaviour of the MDRS155 E systems in case of an equipment failure on the Rx side strongly depends on which components are affected. The worst case occurs in case of a failure in the RF preamplifier section, while all other circuits continue to operate correctly. Fig. 18-3 shows the situation resulting from such a failure.

Fig. 18-3:

Equipment failure on the receive side (V)

In the RxV receiver, an insufficient level is detected. If the ATPC circuit is active, the signal power of the TxV transmitter is increased up to its maximum value (e.g. 30.5 dBm), whereas the power of the horizonal channel, i.e. of the undisturbed transmission channel, remains at its minimum value (e.g. 10.5 dBm). The XPD in the horizontal channel deteriorates by the difference between the two transmit levels, i.e. it is reduced in the present example from 35 dB (typical antenna XPD) to 15 dB. For 64 MLQAM and 128 MLQAM transmission, this S/N ratio is not sufficient for a correct data transmission without XPIC. Simultaneously, it is no longer possible to compensate the cross-talk effects Hhv(f) from the vertical to the horizontal polarization in the demodulator, since the compensation path XPEhv is affected by the interrupted signal transmission. The faulty RxV receiver continues to control its output level to the nominal value. The signal, however, contains only noise. The control loops in the demodulator of the vertical polarization cannot synchronize themselves any more to a modulation signal. This results in a shutdown of both XPE filters. Thus, it is prevented that the receiver noise is transferred via the XPIC to the undisturbed channel and that its signal quality is additionally affected. As soon as the demodulator can no longer synchronize, a timer is started in the receiver. The runtime of this timer can be adjusted in the Hardware View of the MSP in the "Main Receiver module under the "Error timer" configuration option. After expiry of the timer, the transmit level is controlled to a value RF/160 OI 18-3

Annex 3: Co-channel Operation with XPIC

Operating Instructions

defined for this fault condition. This value must be adjusted in the Configuration window under the "Tx level after error timer has expired/Manual Tx level" menu item. Using these settings, the transmitter of the faulty channel can be reduced to its mininum level after timer expiry. Thus, the S/N ratio in the channel not affected by the equipment failure can be improved and bit-error-free transmission can be restored with a radio channel not affected by fading events and antennas with a sufficient XPD factor. The following settings are recommended for the ATPC timer and Tx level under fault conditions: Error timer = 4 min. Tx level after error timer has expired/Manual Tx level = minimum value Reason: The required availability of 99.999% corresponds to an outage of 5.25 min./per year. This outage is composed of a number of short failures (due to events occurring on the radio hop such as fading or precipitation). It is not expected that a single event could already last for this entire permissible outage. Thus, when entering 4 min. as default value, it should still be possible to distinguish between failures due to fading and failures due to equipment defects. However, the selection of a value <4 min. can lead to a longer outage in case of failures caused by fading effects, since in this case, the Tx level will possibly be reduced before the fading event disappears. This would result in an additional deterioration of the S/N ratio.

18.4.3 Failure of the ATPC control channel


In case of a transmission failure in the return direction, the ATPC control information of the TxH and TxV transmitters will get lost (see Fig. 18-1). The system behaviour in this case can be configured in the Hardware View of the MSP in the "Transmitter" module under the "ATPC fault processing" menu item. If the "XPIC dependence" option is active, both transmitters operating at the same frequency and on crossed polarizations, are simultaneously controlled up to their maximum output level, as soon as at least one of the two ATPC control channels fails. If this option is not active, only the transmitter affected by the control channel failure will be controlled up to its maximum level, while the transmitter on the crossed polarization will continue to operate normally.
In the CCDP mode, it is recommended to activate the "ATPC dependence" option.

As soon as the ATPC control channel fails, a timer is started in the transmitter. The runtime of this timer is adjustable via the "Error timer option. After expiry of this timer, the transmitter affected by the control channel failure is controlled to the value adjusted in the same configuration window under the "Tx level after error timer has expired" option. At the same time, the transmitter not affected by the control channel failure returns to normal operation (provided that the "XPIC dependence" option has been activated). It is recommended to made the settings as described in section 18.4.2, i.e. Error timer = 4 min Tx level after error timer expiry = minimum value For reasons why these settings should be made, see section 18.4.2. This system behaviour is primarily based on the assumption that the ATPC control channel has been interrupted in the return direction due to strong fading effects, so that no information on the Tx power required is available. In order to avoid negative effects on the go direction, the power of the transmitter affected is increased up to its maximum value. Simultaneously, the cross-polar transmitter is controlled up to its maximum transmit power (XPIC dependence = ON), since the cross-polar S/N ratio in this channel would otherwise deteriorate by the ATPC control range. Thus, it is possible to create the best prerequisites to maintain the availability of the transmission link in the undisturbed direction even in case of fading effects eventually occurring. After expiry of the timer it is assumed that not a fading event, but an equipment failure has led to the interruption of the control channel. In this case, it is reasonable to control down the transmitter to its miniumum output level in order to minimize the noise level affecting the transmission channels still operational. 18-4 RF/160 OI

Vous aimerez peut-être aussi